JP2017093954A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of efficiently outputting performance sound.SOLUTION: When a specific performance is executed in a first performance mode, channel setup means sets sound data of first operation sound to a same sound output channel on the basis of execution of an operation to operation means, however, when a prescribed condition is satisfied and the specific performance is executed in a second performance mode different from the first performance mode, sets sound data of second operation sound different from the first operation sound to the same sound output channel on the basis of execution of the operation to the operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 91

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine that uses a game ball, when a game ball enters the start opening, a random value for jackpot determination is acquired, whether or not it is a jackpot (lottery lottery), is determined to be a jackpot In the case of a special game, a special game (bonus) is controlled in which the special winning opening is opened.

  For example, as described in Patent Document 1, many of such gaming machines provide an effect of displaying an effect image on an image display device and outputting an effect sound from a speaker during the execution of a game. I am doing so.

JP 2014-233590 A

  However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is not devised to efficiently output effect sound in output control of effect sound.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can output a production sound efficiently.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application is a storage means for storing sound data, a plurality of sound output channels, and a channel setting for setting sound data for each sound output channel. A game machine comprising: means, sound output means for outputting sound based on sound data set in the sound output channel, effect control means for controlling effects related to the game, and operation means operable by the player. The effect control means can execute a specific effect that prompts the operation means to perform a plurality of operations, and the channel setting means can perform the specific effect when the specific effect is performed in the first effect mode. The sound data of the first operation sound is set to the same sound output channel based on the operation performed on the operation means, satisfies a predetermined condition, and has a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The sound data of the second operation sound different from the first operation sound is set in the same sound output channel based on the operation performed on the operation means when the specific effect is performed. It is characterized by doing.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to efficiently output a production sound in a gaming machine.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a gaming machine. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table for 1st special symbols, (b) is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table for 2nd special symbols. (A) is a figure which shows the special symbol determination table for jackpot winning, (b) is a figure which shows the special symbol determination table for small hitting, (c) shows the special symbol determination table for loss FIG. (A) is a figure which shows a jackpot game control table, (b) is a figure which shows the 1st jackpot game big prize opening / closing control table, (c) is a 2nd big prize game big prize opening / closing control table. (D) is a figure which shows the 3rd big hit game big prize opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure which shows a small hit game control table, (b) is a figure which shows the big prize opening / closing control table for small hit games. (A) is a figure which shows a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure which shows a game condition determination table. It is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in a low probability game state and a non-time-short game state. (A) is a figure which shows the hit determination table for normal symbols, (b) is a figure which shows a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a figure which shows a common figure change pattern determination table, (d) (A) is a figure which shows an auxiliary | assistant game control table, (f) is a figure which shows a 2nd start opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of the special symbol reservation memory area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of each memory | storage part of a special symbol reservation memory area, (c) is a normal symbol of the main RAM 101c. It is a figure which shows the structure of a pending | holding storage area, (d) is a figure which shows the structure of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol pending | holding storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an error control process on the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in an effect control board. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the command analysis process of FIG. 31. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the change production control processing in an production control board. It is a figure which shows an effect mode determination table. (A) is a figure which shows a zone production scenario table, (b)-(e) is a figure which shows a zone production scenario determination table. (A) is a figure which shows a holding | maintenance effect scenario table, (b) is a figure which shows a holding | maintenance effect determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode AX. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode AY. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode AZ. It is a figure which shows the additional production type determination table for determining the type of each additional production for every fluctuation production pattern of production mode AX. It is a figure which shows the additional production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each additional production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode AX. It is a figure which shows the additional production type determination table for determining the type of each additional production for every fluctuation production pattern of production mode AY. It is a figure which shows the additional production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each additional production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode AY. It is a figure which shows the additional production type determination table for determining the type of each additional production for every variation production pattern of production mode AZ. It is a figure which shows the additional production information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each additional production which can be performed in the fluctuation production of production mode AZ. It is a figure which shows a meter value reduction number determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of liquid crystal control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows V blank interruption process of liquid crystal control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows a game hall side volume adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect input control process. It is a flowchart which shows production mode A change processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows an image designating process at the time of advance notice operation, (b) is a flowchart which shows an effect image designation process corresponding to an advance notice. It is a flowchart which shows a decision effect image designation | designated process. It is a flowchart which shows a menu control process. It is a flowchart which shows a volume adjustment control process. It is a flowchart which shows a light quantity adjustment control process. It is a flowchart which shows an image designation | designated process. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of a sound designation | designated process. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the sound designation process of FIG. 59. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a sound reproduction control process. (A) is a flowchart which shows a stereo data channel designation | designated process, (b) is a flowchart which shows a monaural data channel designation | designated process. It is a flowchart which shows a design change effect sound volume change control process. It is a flowchart which shows the volume level setting process in VDP. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the example of a fluctuation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the change process of effect sound at the time of effect mode changing. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the example of zone production. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the control process of the effect sound of a zone effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the example of zone production. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the example of zone production. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of the delay process performed with respect to sound data. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of the delay process performed with respect to sound data. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the control process of the effect sound in special reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the example of a fluctuation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the production sound in jackpot game. It is a figure which shows a sound information table. It is a figure which shows a sound information table. It is a figure which shows a sound information table. It is a figure which shows a sound information table. It is a figure which shows a sound information table. It is a figure which shows a sound information table. It is a figure which shows a sound information table. It is a figure which shows a sound information table. It is a figure which shows an adjustment sound volume information table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a sound reproduction area | region roughly. It is a figure which shows the structure of a sound reproduction area | region in detail. It is a figure which shows the structure of a sound reproduction area | region in detail. It is a figure which shows the structure of a sound reproduction area | region in detail. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the example of a fluctuation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the example of a fluctuation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of an effect of advance notice. It is a figure which shows a menu selection screen. It is a figure which shows a volume adjustment screen. FIG. 66 is a diagram for describing the specific content of the variation effect executed in the example shown in FIG. 65. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific effect content of the change effect performed in the example shown in FIG.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention (also referred to as “present embodiments”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the game area 2A in a state where the game board 2 is closed so as to be visible.

  A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y <b> 2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 that stores a plurality of game balls and a firing operation device 3 that can perform an operation for firing the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launch device (not shown) that can launch a game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launcher is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the game ball launcher.

  The firing operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a launch handle 32 that is rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball launcher launches a game ball with a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32.

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a special winning opening 8, which will be described later, are arranged and a game ball is placed. A guidance member 29 </ b> D having a guidance path that can be guided to the second starting port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into the approximate center of the game board 2. An image display device 14 including a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Also, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired with a predetermined game ball launch strength rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and windmills are provided. A game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning awards 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detecting sensor 11a. When the general winning opening detecting sensor 11a detects a gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. .

  A first winning gate 9 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. In addition, a second winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The first winning gate 9 and the second winning gate 10 are provided with a first winning gate detection sensor 9a and a second winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first winning gate detection sensor 9a and the second winning gate detection sensor 10a detect a game ball. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  A first start port 6 is provided below the image display device 14 at the lower part of the game area 2A and is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A variable second start port 7 is provided immediately below the first start port 6. The second start port 7 is controlled by the second start port control device 70 to either a basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning a prize or a special mode (open mode) of winning. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The normal movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the movable piece 70A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the second start port 7 is opened. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a basic mode of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 70A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second start port 7. The second start port 7 is controlled to a special mode that allows the ball to enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normal movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second start-up port control device 70 is that the normal symbol lottery described above is determined as the winning normal symbol.

  On the downstream side of the second winning gate 10, a variable large winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which a winning is possible. The big winning opening 8 is provided with a big winning opening detecting sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the big prize opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The special prize opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a special prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the special movable piece 80A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the special winning opening 8 is closed. doing. The closing of the special prize opening 8 by the special movable piece 80 </ b> A constitutes the basic mode of the special prize opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the special winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which a ball can be entered. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special winning piece 80A is opened, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the above-described first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). In other words, the jackpot special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is determined.

  A symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, and a normal symbol display device 22, each having an LED, on the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A. 1 special symbol hold display device 23, second special symbol hold display device 24, normal symbol hold display device 25, round game number display device 26 for displaying the number of round games (round game number) in jackpot game, launch operation device 3 The operation handle 32 is rotated at a relatively large angle, and the game ball is fired toward the right side of the game area 2A, and a right-hand strike is performed to give a so-called “right-hand” instruction to reach the big winning opening 8. A display device 27 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is This is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  In the first special symbol lottery, a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, whether or not a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and displays the first special symbol lottery representing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Stop display is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol display device 21.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21 blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery lights up.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays a result of a normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the first winning gate 9 and the second winning gate 10. The normal symbol lottery is a random value for winning determination when the game ball passes the first winning gate 9 and the second winning gate 10, and the acquired winning determination random value is a random value corresponding to “win”. This refers to the process of determining whether or not there is.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped. That is, the normal symbol stop display on the normal symbol display device 22 is a notification of the lottery result.

  For example, each of the normal symbol display devices 22 includes a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a normal symbol, specific LED showing the result of a normal symbol lottery lights.

  By the way, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 6 and the second starting port 7 during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the special winning opening control device 80 is operated, the special symbol variation is immediately performed. The display is not performed and the result of the special symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the special symbol variation display may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a fixed condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each start port (first start port 6 and second start port 7). That is, it is possible to hold up to four rights to execute the special symbol variation display for each start port (the first start port 6 and the second start port 7).

  The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the hold number (U1: hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). To do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the hold number (U2: hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure change display”). To do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turn on a predetermined LED according to the number of holds.

  Similarly, for the variable symbol display (hereinafter referred to as “general variable display”), the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number (G: hereinafter referred to as “general map reserved number”). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of hold of the normal symbols.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the first effect accessory device 1701, the second effect accessory device 1702, and the third effect use. It is comprised with the accessory apparatus 1703. FIG. An image display device 14, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided on the game board 2, and the sound output device 15 and the effect lighting device are provided. 16 is provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs various effects by displaying various still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The first effect accessory device 1701 includes a first decorative member 17A as a movable member. The second effect accessory device 1702 includes a second decorative member 17B as a movable member. The third effect accessory device 1703 includes a third decorative member 17C as a movable member. Each effect accessory device operates a decorative member as a movable member provided therein, and performs an effect by the operation.

  The sound output device 15 produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp.

  As will be described later, the first decorative member 17A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effect accessory device 1701 by drive control of the lamp CPU 104a. Accordingly, the first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” (original position) above the image display device 14 to “operation position 1-1” (the position of the center of the front surface of the image display device 14). Move to (position after movement). The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, via “operation position 1-1”. To do. The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” and then returns to “standby position 1”, or from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1”. After moving to “operation position 1-2” via “−1”, a movement operation is performed such as returning to “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1”.

  Similarly, the second decorative member 17B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second effect accessory device 1702 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a. As a result, the second decorative member 17B falls to the left from the “standby position 2” (original position), which is the right position of the image display device 14, with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum. 14 moves to “operation position 2” (position after movement), which is the position of the front surface. When the second decorative member 17B moves from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, the second decorative member 17B then stands on the right side with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, and reaches the “standby position 2” (original position). A moving operation such as returning is performed.

Similarly, the third decorative member 17C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the third effect accessory device 1703 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a. As a result, the third decorative member 17C falls to the right side from the “standby position 3” (original position), which is the position on the lower left side of the image display device 14, with the lower side of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum. It moves to “operation position 3” (position after movement) which is the position of the front surface of the device 14. When the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operating position 3”, the third decorative member 17C then stands on the left side with the lower side of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum, and reaches the “standby position 3” (original position). An operation such as returning is possible.
Note that the first decorative member 17A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C are not limited to the shapes and operation modes described here.

  In addition, the saucer 50 is provided with a first effect button device 18 and a second effect button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects and pachilog games (including bonus games) described later. Yes.

  The first effect button device 18 includes a first effect button 18A as an operable “first operation means”, a first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 that detects a pressing operation on the first effect button 18A, and a first effect button. A protrusion state detection switch 18a21 for detecting that 18A is held at the maximum special operation position described later is provided (see FIG. 3).

The first effect button 18A includes a non-projecting state (FIG. 2A) in which the first effect button 18A is a normal operation position, and a protruding state (FIG. 2 (FIG. 2) b)) and the state when detecting the pressing operation can be changed to a state (FIG. 2 (c)) withdrawn downward from the non-projecting state.
In the non-projecting state, the first effect button 18A is a state in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surface around the saucer 50.
Further, in the protruding state, the first effect button 18A is in a state of protruding several times (about 7 to 10 times) above the non-projecting state from the surface around the tray 50.
Further, the first effect button 18A is slightly lowered from the surface around the saucer 50 and enters a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. That is, the first effect button device 18 has a structure in which the first effect button 18A can be changed into a non-projecting state, a protruding state, and a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state or the projecting state is pressed to enter the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and when the pressing operation is subsequently released, the pressed state returns to the non-projecting state.

  The direction in which the first effect button 18A moves between the position in the non-projecting state, the position in the protruding state, and the position where the pressing operation is detected (pressed position) is the forward / backward direction of the first effect button 18A. To do.

  When the first effect button 18A is in a state where a pressing operation is detected, the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 detects that the first effect button 18A has been completely pressed. A signal is output to the lamp control board 104.

  Further, when the first effect button 18A is in the protruding state, a protruding state detection signal indicating that the protruding state detection switch 18a21 is held at the position where the first effect button 18A protrudes to the maximum (the position of the protruding state) is generated. Output to the lamp control board 104.

  Moreover, the first effect button 18A has a transparent member that can transmit light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the first effect button 18A to the outside, and the first effect button 18A is illuminated.

  Further, the first effect button device 18 constitutes a tray unit U and a discharge device U1 having a discharge button U11 for discharging game balls accumulated in a lower plate (not shown) to the outside of the gaming machine Y. Yes. The dish unit U is operably accommodated in the tray 50.

  The second effect button device 19 is provided on the left side of the first effect button device 18, and is connected to the second effect button 19A as an operable “second operation means” and the second effect button 19A. And a second effect button operation detection switch 19a for detecting a pressing operation on the second effect button 19A (see FIG. 3).

  The second effect button 19A has an upper part 191A, a left part 192A, a lower part 193A, a right part 194A, and a central part 195A. The entire top surface of the second effect button 19A including the upper portion 191A, the left portion 192A, the lower portion 193A, the right portion 194A, and the central portion 195A is provided so as to be able to be pressed down in a state of slightly protruding from the tray 50. .

  Further, the second effect button 19A has a transparent member that can transmit light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the second effect button 19A to the outside, and the second effect button 19A is illuminated.

In the second effect button 19A, the light emission mode changes between an operation effective period in which an operation on the second effect button 19A is enabled and a period other than that.
For example, the lighting state of the second effect button 19A changes between the operation effective period and other periods. For example, the second effect button 19A is in a “lighting state” that is lit in any color during the operation effective period, and is in a “non-lighting state” that is not lit in other periods. Further, for example, the second effect button 19A is “a state in which it is lit in a specific color (for example, red)” in the operation effective period, and “in a color different from the operation effective period (for example, blue) in other periods”. "Lighting state".

  The second effect button operation detection switch 19a is a second effect button operation detection signal indicating that the second effect button 19A has been pressed on the lamp control board 104 when the second effect button 19A is pressed. Is output. The lamp control board 104 outputs the second effect button operation detection signal to the effect control board 102 when receiving the second effect button operation detection signal.

  The second effect button operation detection switch 19a includes an upper operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the upper portion 191A, a left operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the left portion 192A, and a lower operation that detects a pressing operation of the lower portion 193A. The switch includes a detection switch, a right operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the right portion 194A, and a center operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the center portion 195A (not shown).

When the detection switches of the upper part 191A, the left part 192A, the lower part 193A, the right part 194A, and the central part 195A in the second effect button operation detection switch 19a detect a pressing operation, respectively, an upper operation detection signal, a left part operation detection signal, The lower operation detection signal, the right operation detection signal, and the center operation detection signal are output to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. Here, the upper operation detection signal, the left operation detection signal, the lower operation detection signal, and the right operation detection signal are collectively referred to as a “second effect button operation detection signal”.
Note that the left portion 192A and the right portion 194A of the second effect button operation detection switch 19a are displayed on the “volume adjustment screen” (see FIG. 93), which will be described later, so that the player can change from “0” to “5”. This is a volume adjustment switch that can adjust the volume level in six stages. In this volume adjustment switch, the right part 194A is an operation key for increasing the volume level, and the left part 192A is an operation key for decreasing the volume level.

  In the present embodiment, a state in which an operation on the first effect button 18A as the “first operation means” or the second effect button 19A as the “second operation means” is validated is referred to as an “operation valid state”. The sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute a predetermined effect by operating an operation means that enables the operation in the “operation effective state”.

Examples of the “operation effective state” include an “operation effective state” which is a predetermined period set in advance, and an “operation effective state” when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
As an example of this predetermined condition, the designated operation execution flag is set to ON when the sub CPU 102a performs a single pressing operation of the first effect button 18A during the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. Can be mentioned. The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid state for validating the operation on the second effect button 19A based on the designation operation execution flag being set to ON.

  Further, on the surface (back surface) opposite to the game board 2 and the glass door Y2 in the gaming machine Y, a game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 is provided. The game hall side volume control switch 30 is, for example, a rotary rotary switch.

  Since the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 is provided on the back side of the gaming machine Y, it cannot be operated by the player, and can be operated by a store clerk or the like of the game hall. A signal from the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 is input to the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa of the image control board 105.

  The game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 can adjust the volume level in six stages from “0” to “5” when the game machine Y is energized after the power is turned on. The volume level from “0” to “5” that can be adjusted by the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 is the start value (initial value) of the volume level that can be adjusted by the player using the second effect button operation detection switch 19a (this value) Is also referred to as “volume level initial value”).

  The volume level adjusted by operating the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 and the volume level adjusted by operating the left part 192A or the right part 194A of the second effect button operation detection switch 19a are both described later in the VRAM 105Be. Is set in the “volume level setting area”. The volume value of the volume level set in this volume level setting area is the upper limit value of the volume that can be output by the gaming machine Y, and is referred to as “master volume”.

  As will be described later, the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab of the image control board 105 stores a sound information table (FIGS. 76 to 83) in which sound information for specifying sound data is stored. This sound information is associated with a “basic volume” unique to the sound data.

  The sound data of the production sound output in the production related to the game is the basic volume (any one of “1” to “4”) unique to the sound data, and the current volume level set in the volume level setting area ( It is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volumes (any one of “0” to “5”).

  In addition, the sound data of “error notification sound 4 (lower plate full error)” (sound number: E4), which will be described later, is currently set in the volume level setting area at the basic volume “5” unique to the sound data. Is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the volume level (any one of “0” to “5”).

On the other hand, “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1), “error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection error)” (sound number: E2) ”, and“ error notification sound 3 ( The sound data of “door open error” ”(sound number: E3)” is set to the maximum volume of the basic volume “5” unique to the sound data, regardless of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area. The sound is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the volume of level “5”.
Note that the sound data of “error notification sound 4 (bottom full tank error)” (sound number: E4) is also “error notification sound 4 (bottom)” regardless of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area. “Dish full error” ”(sound number: E4), the basic volume“ 5 ”inherent to the sound data and the output volume obtained by multiplying the volume of a fixed volume level (for example,“ 1 ”or“ 2 ”) It may be output from the output device 15.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special drawing lottery effect that is performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special drawing lottery effect is performed in the image display device 14. In the special drawing lottery effect, a change display of the special effect symbol and a stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

  The special effect symbol variation display is performed corresponding to the special symbol variation display, and the special effect symbol varies in a predetermined manner. The special effect symbol stop display is performed in response to the special symbol stop display (hereinafter, the special effect symbol change display and stop display are collectively referred to as “special effect symbol display”). In the special effect symbol stop display, the special effect symbol stops in a predetermined manner representing the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special decorative symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, “1” to “9”) arranged in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. Decorative design that represents numbers). In the variation display of the special effect design, the special decoration design in each column moves (variation display) from top to bottom as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of special effect symbols is not limited to this. In addition, during the variation display of the special effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the special effect design stop display, the above-mentioned three rows of special decoration designs are stopped and displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. The arrangement of special decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 140) when the special effect symbols are stopped and displayed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special drawing lottery effect, a roulette effect that is triggered by a normal symbol lottery described later, a special game effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a special symbol variation display or special game is performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

  On the back surface of the gaming machine Y, a control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided. The control means includes a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108, and the like.

(Control configuration of gaming machine Y)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, An interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 101a becomes inactive state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and for example, a battery may be used, and a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (quartz crystal units) and the like, performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, a first starting port detection sensor 6a, a second starting port detection sensor 7a, a big winning port detection sensor 8a, and a first winning gate detection are detected via an input port (not shown). The sensor 9a, the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and the general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when detecting a game ball.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, via an output port (not shown), a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normal movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70, and a prize winning port control. A special prize opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold are provided via an output port (not shown). A display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each display device 20-25.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information relating to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  A first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, a protruding state detection switch 18a21, and a second effect button operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the first effect button 18A is pressed (pressed) and reaches the operation detection position, the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 indicates that the first effect button 18A is pressed on the lamp control board 104. 1 Production button operation detection signal is output. The lamp control board 104 outputs a first effect button operation detection signal input from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11 to the effect control board 102.

  The protruding state detection switch 18a21 outputs a protruding state detection signal to the lamp control board 104 when the first effect button 18A is positioned in the protruding state. The lamp control board 104 outputs the protruding state detection signal input from the protruding state detection switch 18a21 to the effect control board 102.

  The second effect button operation detection switch 19a is a second effect button operation detection signal indicating that the second effect button 19A has been pressed on the lamp control board 104 when the second effect button 19A is pressed. Is output. The lamp control board 104 outputs the second effect button operation detection signal to the effect control board 102 when receiving the second effect button operation detection signal.

  The sub CPU 102a receives the command output from the main control board 101, the first effect button operation detection signal output from the first effect button device 18, the second effect button operation detection signal, the protruding state detection signal, and the second effect button. Based on the selection button detection signal output from the device 19, the input signal from the timer (quartz crystal unit), etc., the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on this arithmetic processing, the lamp A command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the control board 104 and the image control board 105. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 and detects the rotation angle.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. The payout control board 103 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41 when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the firing volume knob 32 b is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this manner, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the launching device 4. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, a payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, an effect lighting device 16 and an effect accessory device 17 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a performs light emission control of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiation of light from the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”). Drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. In addition, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on the solenoid and the motor that operate the effect accessory device 17 based on the control details of the effect specified by the effect control command. Further, the lamp CPU 104a controls the electric motor 18b that moves the first effect button 18A of the first effect button device 18 between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the control contents of the effect specified by the effect control command. Drive control and light emission control for causing the LED 1821d of the first effect button device 18 to emit light are performed.

  A first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, a protruding state detection switch 18a21, and a second effect button operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

  The lamp control board 104 has a first effect button operation detection signal from the first effect button operation detection switch 18a11, a protrusion state detection signal from the protrusion state detection switch 18a21, or a first effect button operation detection switch 18a11. When the effect button operation detection signal is input, the input detection signal is output to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 detects the first effect button operation detection signal, the protruding state detection signal, and the second effect button operation detection between the effect control board 102 and the first effect button device 18 and the second effect button device 19. Relay the signal.

  The image control board 105 performs control to display an image such as a moving image or a still image on the image display device 14 and control to output sound from the sound output device 15.

  The image control board 105 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, a liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, a liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba (hereinafter referred to as “VDP 105Ba”), a CGROM 105Bb, a crystal oscillator 105Bc, and a sound data ROM 105Bd. And a VRAM 15Be.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa generates a display list based on the effect control command (a change effect control command, an opening effect control command, a round effect control command, an ending effect control command, etc.) received from the effect control board 102 and transmits it to the VDP 105 </ b> Ba. Thus, an instruction to display the image data stored in the CGROM 105Bb on the image display device 14 is issued.

When the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa receives the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 105Ba, it appropriately performs an interrupt process.
The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa outputs sound data such as effect sound and error notification sound from the sound output device 15 to the VDP 105Ba based on the control content of the effect specified by the effect control command received from the effect control board 102. To give instructions.

  The liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs arithmetic processing, and temporarily stores data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and includes a control processing program for the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, and animation scene information. Etc. are stored.

  The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores a combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, a display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In the animation scene information, a wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image are displayed. Information such as information specifying a display device is stored.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). doing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  The CGROM 105Bb is read in units of image data by the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba performs image processing in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 105Bb stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed.
The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The crystal oscillator 105Bc transmits a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba and divides the pulse signal to generate a system clock for the VDP 105Ba to control, a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and the like. .

  The VRAM 105Be is composed of a high-speed SRAM for writing or reading image data, and has a memory map (not shown). This memory map is composed of an image data development area consisting of an arbitrary area, a display list storage area, a frame buffer area consisting of a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer, and other areas.

  The image data development area is an area for storing image data expanded by an expansion circuit as will be described later included in the VDP 105Ba. The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa. It is an area to do.

  The VDP 105Ba includes a frame buffer area including a “first frame buffer” and a “second frame buffer” that are alternately switched between a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started (not shown). ) The “first frame buffer” and “second frame buffer” are work areas for drawing effect images to be displayed on the image display device 14 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area. In addition, palette data etc. are memorize | stored in the other area | region of a memory map, for example. The two frame buffers, the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer, each time drawing starts, when one frame buffer functions as a drawing frame buffer, the other frame buffer functions as a display frame buffer. It becomes.

  The VDP 105Ba reads image data from the “display frame buffer” based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa. The VDP 105Ba generates a video signal (such as an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) based on the read image data, and outputs the video signal to the image display device 14 for display.

  The VDP 105Ba includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus I / F, a CPU I / F, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, and a memory controller, which are connected by a bus.

  The control register is a register for the VDP 105Ba to control drawing and display, and drawing control and display control are performed by writing and reading data to and from the control register. The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa writes and reads data to and from the control register via the CPU I / F.

  The control register includes a “system control register” for performing basic settings necessary for the operation of the VDP 105Ba, a “data transfer register” for performing settings necessary for data transfer, and settings for controlling drawing. "Drawing register" to perform, "Bus interface register" to make settings necessary for bus access, "Decompression register" to make settings necessary to decompress compressed images, and settings to control display There are six types of registers, “display registers”.

  The CG bus I / F is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 105Bb, and image data from the CGROM 105Bb is input to the VDP 105Ba via the CG bus I / F.

  The CPU I / F is an interface circuit for communication with the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa. Through this CPU I / F, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa outputs a display list to the VDP 105Ba, accesses a control register, and outputs from the VDP 105Ba. Various interrupt signals are input to the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa.

  The data transfer circuit performs data transfer between various devices. Specifically, data transfer between the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and the VRAM 105e, data transfer between the CGROM 105Bb and the VRAM 105Be, and data transfer between various storage areas (including the frame buffer) of the VRAM 105Be are performed.

  The clock generation circuit receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 105Bc and generates a system clock that determines the calculation processing speed of the VDP 105Ba. Also, a synchronization signal generation clock is generated, and the synchronization signal is output to the image display device 14 via the display circuit.

  The decompression circuit is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 105Bb, and stores the decompressed image data in the image data development area.

  The drawing circuit is a circuit that performs sequence control based on a display list composed of drawing control commands.

The display circuit outputs color data of an image as a video signal from image data (digital signal) stored in a frame buffer functioning as a “display frame buffer” out of the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer in the VRAM 105Be. The video signal shown is generated.
The display circuit is a circuit that outputs the generated video signal to the image display device 14. Further, the display circuit also outputs a synchronizing signal (vertical synchronizing signal, horizontal synchronizing signal, etc.) for synchronizing with the image display device 14.

  When there is an instruction to switch the frame buffer from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the memory controller performs control to switch between the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer”.

The sound data ROM 105Bd stores sound data specified by sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab.
The VDP 105Ba reads out sound data stored in the sound data ROM 105Bd based on a reproduction command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and reproduces it in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. For the sound data of the production sound or the sound data of “error notification sound 4 (bottom plate full error)” (sound number: E4), the VDP 105Ba has the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be as the basic volume of the sound data to be reproduced. Then, control is performed to output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the volume level currently set. In addition, the VDP 105Ba includes “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1), “error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection error)” (sound number: E2), and “error notification sound 3”. For the sound data of “(door open error)” (sound number: E3), the maximum volume level “5” is designated regardless of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area, and the sound data Control is performed to output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the basic volume “5” specific to the volume of the volume level “5”.

  In the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, one or more “animation patterns” in which the scenes that are the timing and scenes for displaying the effect image are designated in addition to the object that is the configuration information constituting the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. A plurality of “animation groups” formed by being bundled are stored.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa determines the animation pattern for generating the effect image based on the control content of the hold effect designated by the effect control command received from the effect control board 102, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa A display list is generated for each frame (every frame).

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa transmits (outputs) the display list thus generated to the VDP 105Ba.

  Here, the display list generation method is such that the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa changes the contents of the animation scene at the current number of frames based on the “frame counter” indicating the current frame and the determined animation pattern (animation scene). The display list for the current number of frames is generated by generating the drawing control command according to the priority (drawing order) of each animation group.

The liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac has a “scene switching counter” that counts and updates for each frame, and this “scene switching counter” performs this first animation while the first animation scene is being executed. By counting the number of frames in the scene, the animation scene is switched to the second animation scene.
Then, while the second animation scene is being executed, the second animation scene ends after the “scene switching counter” counts the number of frames of the second animation scene.

  “1 frame” is the update timing of the vertical synchronization signal. For example, when the image display device 14 displays 60 frames per second, every “1/60 seconds (about 16.6 ms)”. One frame is updated. In this embodiment, it is assumed that one frame is updated every "1/60 seconds (about 16.6 ms)". However, the present invention is not limited to this, but "1/30 seconds (about 33.3 ms)". 1 frame may be updated every time. " In this case, the image display device 14 displays an image for 30 frames per second.

  FIG. 76A is a sound information table for storing BGM sound information used in the effect mode AX described later. FIG. 76B is a sound information table for storing BGM sound information used in the effect mode AY. FIG. 76C is a sound information table for storing BGM sound information used in the effect mode AZ. FIG. 76D is a sound information table for storing the sound information of the zone BGM to be output instead of the BGM of the normal effect mode AX, effect mode AY, or effect mode AX. This zone BGM is a BGM made of music different from any of the BGMs of the production mode AX, the production mode AY, and the production mode AZ.

Here, the “sound number” is a number for identifying sound data, and is a number set for each sound data.
“Mono / stereo” is “monaural data” with relatively small data volume such as speech and SE (sound effects), or relatively large data volume such as BGM and musical production sound. It indicates whether it is “stereo data”.

The VRAM 105Be is provided with a sound reproduction area for reproducing sound data. FIG. 85 schematically shows a structure of this sound reproduction area.
“Stereo data” of the sound data has a relatively large amount of data, and is stored in two continuous channels (also referred to as “ch”) in the sound reproduction area. On the other hand, “monaural data” of the sound data is stored in one channel in the sound reproduction area because the data amount is relatively small.
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the sound reproduction area is composed of 14 channels “ch0” to “ch13” as shown in FIG. In the sound reproduction area, a “pair ch” is constituted by two consecutive channels for storing “stereo data”. The “monaural data” is stored in one channel of the “pair ch”.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the sound reproduction area, “ch0” and “ch1” constitute “pair ch1”, “ch2” and “ch3” constitute “pair ch2”, and “ch4” And “ch5” constitute “pair ch3”, “ch6” and “ch7” constitute “pair ch4”, “ch8” and “ch9” constitute “pair ch5”, and “ch10 And “ch11” constitute “pair ch6”, and “ch12” and “ch13” constitute “pair ch7”.

The error notification sound is composed of monaural data using one channel. The error notification sound is more important than the effect sound to notify the player. For this reason, “ch0” to “ch3” are secured as fixed channels for reproducing each error notification sound so that the sound output device 15 does not output them.
“Ch0” includes monaural data of “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1) described later, and “ch1” includes “error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection error)” (described later) ( The monaural data of the sound number: E2) is “ch2”, the monaural data of “error notification sound 3 (door opening error)” (sound number: E3), which will be described later, and the “error” described later, in “ch3”. The monaural data of “notification sound 4 (lower pan full error)” (sound number: E4) is stored in a “stop” state in advance. If any of these errors is detected, a channel unique to the error notification sound is designated based on the error instruction sound reproduction command of the error that has occurred, and the designated channel The monaural data of the error notification sound is reproduced.

  In this way, in the sound reproduction area, “ch0” to “ch3” constituting “pair ch1” and “pair ch2” are fixed channels for error notification sounds, and therefore “ch4” and subsequent “ The sound data of the production sound is reproduced by “ch4” to “ch13” (which constitutes “pair ch3” to “pair ch7”). In “ch4” to “ch13”, no sound data is stored in a state where any sound is not reproduced. The sound data is stored in the channel designated by the stereo data channel designating process in step S2604 or the monaural data channel designating process in step S2605, which will be described later, and is erased from the channel when the playback is finished. Is done.

  The VDP 105Ba has an output volume obtained by multiplying a ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the sound data by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area, and outputs the sound data to the sound output device 15. Control to output from. That is, the VDP 105Ba is a sound output device with an output volume obtained by multiplying a ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the sound data by the master volume (dB) of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area. 15 is controlled to output sound data.

  As the “basic volume” of the sound data, “1” to “5” can be set. The sound data whose “basic volume” is “1” is output at an output volume that is 20% of the master volume value of the volume level set in the volume level setting area, and the sound whose “basic volume” is “2”. The data is output at an output volume that is 40% of the master volume value of the volume level set in the volume level setting area, and the sound data whose “basic volume” is “3” is set in the volume level setting area. The sound volume of which the volume level is set to 60% of the master volume value and the sound data whose “basic volume” is “4” is 80% of the master volume value of the volume level set in the volume level setting area. Is output at the output volume of the volume, and the sound data whose “basic volume” is “5” is output at the output volume of 100% of the master volume value of the volume level set in the volume level setting area. It is.

  In the volume level setting area, master volumes of volume levels “0” to “5” can be set. The volume level “0” corresponds to “0 dB” (mute), the volume level “1” corresponds to “50 dB”, the volume level “2” corresponds to 60 dB, and the volume level “3” corresponds to “70 dB”. The volume level “4” corresponds to “80 dB”, and the volume level “5” corresponds to the maximum value “90 dB”.

  When the sound data of the production sound or the sound data of “error notification sound 4 (bottom plate full error)” (sound number: E4) is output from the sound output device 15, the VDP 105Ba has a “basic” The volume value obtained by multiplying the ratio (%) according to “volume” by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area is set as the output volume (dB), and output is performed at this output volume. Control.

  For example, when the volume level “4” corresponding to the master volume value “80 dB” is set in the volume level setting area, the sound data whose “basic volume” is “1” has the master volume value “80 dB”. It is output at an output volume of “16 dB” with a volume of 20%, and sound data with a “basic volume” of “2” is output at an output volume of “32 dB” with a volume of 40% of the master volume value “80 dB”. The sound data whose “basic volume” is “3” is output at an output volume of “48 dB” which is 60% of the master volume value “80 dB”, and the sound data whose “basic volume” is “4”. The sound data with the output volume of “64 dB” that is 80% of the master volume value “80 dB” and the sound data with the “basic volume” of “5” is 100% of the master volume value. It is output at the output volume of the "80dB".

  Further, “priority” (also referred to as “priority order”) indicates the order in which sound data is preferentially output from the sound output device 15. This “priority” is ranked according to the necessity of output, that is, sound data of highly important sounds.

  FIG. 77 (a) is a sound information table for storing sound information of effect sound output in the effect by the effect symbol. FIG. 77 (b) is a sound information table for storing sound information of the jackpot definite sound. FIG. 77 (c) is a sound information table for storing sound information of a rush sound that is output before the output of a zone BGM described later is started. FIG. 77 (d) is a sound information table for storing the sound information of the start winning sound.

Here, “time (s)” is the reproduction time of the sound data.
The “group number” is a number set for a group obtained by grouping sound data of sounds output based on “specific trigger” among sound data having different sound numbers. Although details will be described later, sound data having the same “group number” is stored in the same channel when reproduced in a sound reproduction area described later. As a result, for example, when different sound data belonging to a certain group is continuously played back, even if playback of another sound data is started before stopping the playback of the sound data being played back, Since the sound data is stored in the same channel instead of the channel where the sound data is stored, the number of channels used for reproducing sound data is not increased unnecessarily, and limited channels are used efficiently. The effect that it can be done.

In the present embodiment, as the “specific opportunity”, for example, “the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 game balls enter”, “the first effect button 18A is operated”. Can be mentioned. The “specific opportunity” is not limited to this.
Note that the sound data of sounds output based on all “specific triggers” are not grouped, but only the sound data of sounds output based on any “specific trigger” are grouped. You may do it.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the “starting winning sound 1” and the “specific trigger”, which are output based on the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 game balls entering, The start winning sound 2 ”is grouped into a group“ G1 ”.

  FIG. 78A is a sound information table that stores sound information of the operation sound of the first effect button 18A. “Operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) and “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) shown in FIG. The operation sound is output when the 1 effect button 18A is pressed, and is grouped into a group “G2”.

  FIG. 78 (b) is a sound information table for storing sound information of operation sounds of the left part 192A and the right part 194A of the second effect button 19A at the time of volume adjustment by the player. 78 (b) “Volume 1 notification sound” (sound number: S4-1), “Volume 2 notification sound” (re) (sound number: S4-2), “Volume 3 notification sound” ( Mi) (Sound Number: S4-3), “Volume 4 Notification Sound” (F) (Sound Number: S4-4), “Volume 5 Notification Sound” (So) (Sound Number: S4-5) Is a volume notification sound that is output when the volume level is set based on the pressing operation of the left part 192A or the right part 194A of the second effect button 19A.

  “Volume 1 notification sound” (do) (sound number: S4-1) is a notification sound output when the volume level “1” is set, and “volume 2 notification sound” (re) (sound number). : S4-2) is a notification sound that is output when the volume level “2” is set. “Volume 3 notification sound” (mi) (sound number: S4-3) is a volume level “3”. “Volume 4 notification sound” (F) (sound number: S4-4) is a notification sound output when the volume level “4” is set. “Volume 5 notification sound” (sound) (sound number: S4-5) is a notification sound output when the volume level “5” is set, and these are grouped into the group “G3”. Has been.

The effect sounds shown in FIGS. 79A to 79C are output in a corresponding effect that is executed based on the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period of the variable effect in the effect mode AX. It is a production sound.
FIG. 79A is a sound information table for storing sound information of the effect sound (development notice AX-compatible effect sound) output in the corresponding effect of “development notice AX”. FIG. 79B is a sound information table for storing the sound information of the effect sound output in the corresponding effect of “Serif notice AX” (the effect sound corresponding to the serif notice AX). FIG. 79C is a sound information table for storing sound information of effect sound (determination effect AX-compatible effect sound) output in the corresponding effect of “determination effect AX”.

The effect sounds shown in FIGS. 80A to 80D are output in a corresponding effect that is executed based on the operation of the first effect button 18A in the operation effective period of the variable effect in the effect mode AY. It is a production sound.
FIG. 80A is a sound information table for storing sound information of the effect sound (character notice AY effect sound) output in “character notice AY”. FIG. 80B is a sound information table for storing sound information of effect sound (development notice AY corresponding effect sound) output in the corresponding effect of “development notice AY”. FIG. 80C is a sound information table for storing sound information of the effect sound (the effect sound corresponding to the serif notice AY) that is output in the “line notice AY”. FIG. 80D is a sound information table for storing sound information of effect sound (determination effect AY corresponding effect sound) output in the corresponding effect of “determination effect AY”.

The effect sounds shown in FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (d) are output in the corresponding effect executed based on the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period of the change effect in the effect mode AZ. It is a sound.
FIG. 81 (a) is a sound information table for storing the sound information of the effect sound (character notice AZ (1) effect sound) output in “Character notice AZ (1)”. FIG. 81 (b) is a sound information table for storing the sound information of the effect sound (character notice AZ (2) effect sound) output in “Character notice AZ (2)”. FIG. 81 (c) is a sound information table for storing sound information of effect sound (development notice AZ corresponding effect sound) output in the corresponding effect of “development notice AZ”. FIG. 81 (d) is a sound information table for storing sound information of the effect sound output in the corresponding effect of “Serial notice AZ” (the effect sound corresponding to the serif notice AZ). FIG. 81 (e) is a sound information table for storing sound information of effect sound (determination effect AZ-corresponding effect sound) output in the corresponding effect of “determination effect AZ”.

FIG. 82A is a sound information table storing sound information of effect sound (opening effect sound) output in the opening effect. FIG. 82 (b) is a sound information table storing sound information of effect sound (round effect sound) output in the round effect, and FIG. 82 (c) is effect sound (ending effect sound) output in the ending effect. It is the sound information table which stores the sound information.
FIG. 82 (d) is a table for storing sound information of effect sound (demonstration effect sound) output in the demonstration effect.
FIG. 83 is a sound information table for storing sound information of an error notification sound for notifying an error that has occurred.

  “Loop reproduction” shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 means that sound data is reproduced repeatedly. The sound data of “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) and “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) shown in FIG. ing.

  FIG. 83 is a sound information table for storing sound information of an error notification sound for notifying an error that has occurred. The “error notification sound 1” (sound number: E1) is an error notification sound that is output when an “abnormal prize error” described later is detected. “Error notification sound 2” (sound number: E2) is an error notification sound that is output when a “magnetic detection error” described later is detected. “Error notification sound 3” (sound number: E3) is an error notification sound that is output when a “door opening error” described later is detected. “Error notification sound 4” (sound number: E4) is an error notification sound that is output when a “bottom pan full error” described later is detected.

  “Error notification sound 1” (sound number: E1) to notify “abnormal winning error”, “error notification sound 2” (sound number: E2) to notify “magnetic detection error”, “door open error” The basic volume of “error notification sound 3” (sound number: E3) and “error notification sound 4” (sound number: E4) for reporting “bottom pan full error” are both “5”.

  However, “abnormal winning error”, “magnetic detection error”, and “door opening error” are all errors that are highly likely to be directly related to an illegal act by the player. Therefore, “error notification sound 1” (sound number: E1) for informing “abnormal prize error”, “error notification sound 2” (sound number: E2) for informing “magnetic detection error”, “door opening error” Any volume level of “error notification sound 3” (sound number: E3) for notifying the player cannot be changed by the player.

  On the other hand, the “lower tray full tank error” is an error that occurs when the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 5 and stored in the lower plate (not shown) are filled with the lower plate and are not discharged to the outside. This “bottom-dish full error” is an error that is unlikely to be directly related to a player's fraud, and occurs mainly during a big hit game due to a player's omission. Is eliminated by the player pressing the discharge button U11 to remove the game ball from the lower plate. Therefore, the “lower plate full tank error” is an error having the lowest priority as the importance to be notified to the player. As a result, the volume level of “error notification sound 4” (sound number: E4) for reporting the “lower plate full error” is changed by the player performing an operation of changing the volume level of the effect sound.

  The error notification sound reproduction command transmitted from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa to the VDP 105Ba includes sound information of the error notification sound. As described above, the monaural data of each error notification sound is stored in the “stop” state in “ch0” to “ch3” of the sound reproduction area. When the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sends a playback command specifying a channel in which monaural data of an error notification sound for notifying the detected error is stored to the VDP 105Ba, the VDP 105Ba “stops” on the channel specified by the playback command. The monaural data of the error notification sound stored in the state is reproduced.

  The sound data of “error notification sound 1” to “error notification sound 4” is provided with information indicating that loop reproduction is performed (◯), and is repeatedly reproduced (loop reproduction).

  Note that the sound information table stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 76 to 83, and other sound information tables (not shown) such as various SEs may be further provided. .

  Also, in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, as shown in FIG. 84, an amusement hall side volume adjustment switch level and an initial value of the player side adjustment volume level (this is also simply referred to as “volume level initial value”). Is stored in the adjustment volume information table.

  In this adjusted volume information table, the volume level initial value (“0” to “5”) corresponding to the volume level (“0” to “5”) designated by the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 is associated. Yes.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines the volume corresponding to the switch level (“0” to “5”) designated in the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 based on this adjustment volume information table in step S2104 of FIG. The level initial value (“0” to “5”) is determined.

The liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa determines “0” as the initial value of the sound volume level when the switch level “0” is designated in the game hall-side sound volume adjustment switch 30. When the volume level “0” is set in the volume level setting area, the sound data of the production sound and the sound data of “error notification sound 4” (sound number: E4) are muted (muted) even if reproduced. ) Is controlled.
On the other hand, sound data of “error notification sound 1” (sound number: E1), sound data of “error notification sound 2” (sound number: E2), and sound data of “error notification sound 3” (sound number: E3) Since the maximum volume level “5” is designated even when the volume level “0” is set in the volume level setting area, the ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume “5” Is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the volume value (90 dB) of the maximum volume level “5”.
Note that the sound data of “error notification sound 4” (sound number: E4) also has a fixed volume level (for example, “0”), regardless of the volume level “0” set in the volume level setting area. 1 ”or“ 2 ”) and a volume value (eg,“ 50 dB ”or a fixed volume level (eg,“ 1 ”or“ 2 ”) at a percentage (%) corresponding to the basic volume“ 5 ”. The sound output device 15 may output the sound at an output volume obtained by multiplying “60 dB”).

  Similarly, when the switch level “1” is designated in the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa sets “1” as the initial volume level, and the switch level “1” in the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30. When “2” is designated, “2” is set as the initial value of the volume level, and when switch level “3” is specified in the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30, “3” is set as the initial value of the volume level. When the switch level “4” is designated in the game hall side volume control switch 30, “4” is designated as the initial volume level, and when the switch level “5” is designated in the game hall side volume control switch 30 In this case, “5” is determined as the initial volume level.

  These initial sound volume level values “0” to “5” can be changed within a variable range of “0” to “5” by pressing the right part 194A and the left part 192A of the player's second effect button 19A. It is.

  In the present embodiment, when any one of the volume levels “1” to “5” is set based on the pressing operation of the right part 194A and the left part 192A of the second effect button 19A, as described later. In addition, a notification sound (see FIG. 78B) corresponding to the volume level is output from the sound output device 15.

  As shown in the adjustment volume information table of FIG. 84, when “1” is set based on the pressing operation of the right portion 194A and the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A, the musical scale is “do”. “Volume 1 notification sound” is output from the sound output device 15. When “2” is set, “R” and “Volume 2 notification sound” whose scale is one step higher than “Do” of “Volume 1 notification sound” are output from the sound output device 15. When “3” is set, “sound volume 3 notification sound” of “mi” whose scale is one step higher than “re” of “volume 2 notification sound” is output from the sound output device 15. When “4” is set, “sound volume 4 notification sound” of “F” whose scale is one step higher than “mi” of “volume 3 notification sound” is output from the sound output device 15. When “5” is set, “sound volume 5 notification sound” of “seo” whose scale is one step higher than “fa” of “volume 4 notification sound” is output from the sound output device 15.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the basic volumes of “Volume 1 notification sound” to “Volume 5 notification sound” are all “4”. “Volume 1 notification sound” to “Volume 5 notification sound” is an output volume obtained by multiplying the basic volume “4” by the master volume of volume levels “1” to “5” set in the volume level setting area. Is output. As a result, the output volume increases as “volume 1 notification sound”, “volume 2 notification sound”, “volume 3 notification sound”, “volume 4 notification sound”, and “volume 5 notification sound”.

In the gaming machine Y, the VRAM 105Be is provided with a sound reproduction area for storing sound data of sounds to be reproduced.
FIG. 85 schematically shows a structure of this sound reproduction area. 86 (a), 86 (b) to 88 (a), 88 (b) are diagrams showing in detail the structure of the sound reproduction area shown in FIG. The “data storage area” shown in FIG. 85 is a storage area for the items “sound number” to “reproduction order” shown in FIGS. Equivalent to.

  Here, a detailed configuration of the sound reproduction area will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the sound reproduction area includes “ch0” and “ch1” constituting “pair ch1”, “ch2” and “ch3” constituting “pair ch2”, and “ch4” constituting “pair ch3”. And “ch5”, “ch6” and “ch7” composing “pair ch4”, “ch8” and “ch9” composing “pair ch5”, “ch10” and “ch11” composing “pair ch6”, It consists of “ch12” and “ch13” constituting “pair ch7”.

  For each channel of “ch0” to “ch13”, “sound number”, “group number”, “playback status”, “priority”, “mono / stereo”, “playback volume”, “mute”, “ Storage areas for storing information on “fade”, “loop playback”, “remaining playback time”, and “playback order” are associated with each other.

The “playback status” indicates that “playback information” indicating “playback” is stored when the sound data is being played back in the channel in which the sound data is stored, and is “stopped” (when the sound data is “ In the case of being stored in the “stop” state), “stop information” indicating “stop” is stored.
The “basic volume” is for storing the basic volume of the sound data in the channel in which the sound data is stored.

“Mute” stores information (o) indicating that a mute process for muting the output volume of the sound data is being executed in the channel in which the sound data is stored.
“Fade” means that if a fade process (FI (fade in) or FO (fade out)) is being performed on the output volume of the sound data in the channel in which the sound data is stored, the fact (○ ) Information is stored.

“Loop playback” is information in which (O) is stored when sound data is loop-reproduced in a channel in which sound data is stored.
The “remaining reproduction time (s)” is the one that stores the remaining reproduction time (s) of the sound data being reproduced in the channel in which the sound data is stored.
The “playback order” stores information on the current playback order (playback order) of the sound data being played back in the channel in which the sound data is stored.

  Details of the sound control processing in the image control board 105 will be described later.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  4A and 4B are diagrams showing an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A is a table (a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the first start port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second start port 7.

  Each of the jackpot determination tables is a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “low probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the jackpot winning probability, which will be described later, is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in a relatively high state (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the jackpot determination table, Either “winning” or “losing” is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the jackpot game with the opening of the jackpot 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. If the result of the big hit determination is “small win”, the small win game with the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, neither the jackpot game or the jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, in the variation effect as the special drawing lottery effect, as will be described later, a reach effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit. As the reach effect, for example, the special symbol decoration symbol is pseudo-stopped in two regions of the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 during the variation display of the effect symbol ( (Temporary stop) (a part of the production symbol displays a pseudo stop display), and if the specified special figure decorative symbol stops on the predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, the special symbol decorative symbol representing the winning of the jackpot There is a reach effect in which a state (so-called “reach state”) is generated. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the result of the jackpot determination is still “losing” even if this stunning specific state is reached.

  After the reach state occurs in the reach production, a specific production (so-called “super-reach production”) that increases the expectation of winning a big win may or may not be developed. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit without reaching a reach state. If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the reach effect is basically performed in most cases.

  Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (c) are figures which show an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery. Based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 (special symbol The stop display mode) is determined.

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 5A is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B is the case where the result of the jackpot determination is “small hit”. The table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 5C, is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start opening (the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7) in which a game ball was entered as a trigger for the special symbol determination.

  Each special symbol determination table stores a special symbol determination value and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. A special symbol is determined. As special symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and special effect symbol designating commands are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the special effect design designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process on the effect control board 102. The special effect designating command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the special symbol variable display (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S310).

  The special effect designating command is a 1-byte MODE for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It consists of data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

  Regarding the special effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it means that the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second is displayed. The special symbol display device 21 indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E3H” is referred to as “first special effect symbol designating command”, and the special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E4H” is referred to as “second special effect symbol designating command”. "

  FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of the jackpot game control table used when the jackpot game is controlled.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of the big prize opening 8, and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening Ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the jackpot game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are related to the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 6B to FIG. 6D are diagrams showing an example of the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the big hit game used when the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 is controlled. FIG. 6B is a table referred to in the first jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 6C is a table referred to in the second jackpot game constituting the jackpot game. ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

  The big winning opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 during the big hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, a special number is a round number (R) which is the number of the round game, and an opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hit game control table used when controlling the small hit game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the small hit game, the opening time, which is a period from the start of the small hit game until the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening The opening designation command, the type of table used to control the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, the ending time which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big prize opening 8 to the end of the small hit game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are related to the type of the small hit, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a big prize opening / closing control table for a small hit game used when the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8 is controlled. The big winning opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 during the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 8, a special electric operation number (K) which is an opening of the prize winning opening 8 (operation of the prize winning control device 80), and an opening time of the prize winning opening 8, The closing time (operation time, non-operation time) is set.

  FIG. 8A shows an example of a game condition data determination table that is referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information that represents a game condition that is newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the jackpot winning probability at the time of the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to the jackpot winning probability (low probability gaming state / high probability gaming state), and in each divided table, the type of special symbol (special diagram stop symbol data) and game Condition data is uniquely associated and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents a jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high probability (high probability gaming state) after the jackpot game, and if it is “00H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is low (low probability game). Status). On the other hand, the low-order byte of the game condition data represents the start opening prize ease that is newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the start port winning ease after the jackpot game is set to easy (short time gaming state), and if it is “00H”, the starting port winning ease is difficult after the jackpot game (non-short time gaming state). ).

  FIG. 8B shows an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a game condition that is newly set when the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game end process). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning ease are set as the game conditions.

  The game condition determination table includes game condition data and each game condition, that is, ON / OFF of a flag indicating the game condition (high probability flag and time-short flag) and the number of times of special symbol variable display that can be executed according to the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as “executable number of times”) are uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means the specified number of times of special symbol variable display according to the newly set game conditions. Note that the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed corresponds to the number of determinations for jackpot determination.

As described above, in the gaming machine Y, the main CPU 101a, when executing the jackpot game, is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time-short game state) after the jackpot game ends. A specific gaming state (a high probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state) is set.
The main CPU 101a ends the specific gaming state when the number of jackpot determinations (the number of times that the special symbol display can be performed) reaches 84 times in this specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state). Yes. Thus, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called “ST machine”.

(Special symbol variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation display mode of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special pattern variation pattern”).
FIG. 9 shows an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, after the jackpot game when winning the first jackpot (also referred to as “16R jackpot”) or the second jackpot (also referred to as “8R jackpot”), the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are set. The description of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state will be omitted.
Also, a special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when determining a special variation pattern in the high probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state when winning the third jackpot (also referred to as “2R jackpot”), or small A description of the special-figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when winning the win is also omitted.

  The main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8B) in the main ROM 101b, confirms the current gaming state determined by ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the short time flag, and has a high probability that the current gaming state is high. If it is a gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation display is confirmed, and a special figure variation pattern determination table is selected according to the gaming state or the gaming state and the number of variations.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the current gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG.
In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. Transmit to the substrate 102. The sub CPU 102a controls the changing effect of the effect mode A (effect mode AX, effect mode AY, effect mode AZ) based on the change pattern specified by the special figure change pattern specifying command.

  In the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9, the effect type of the variation effect determined by the sub CPU 102a is described in association with the special diagram variation pattern designation command as a reference.

“Production mode A” is any one of “Production mode AX” to “Production mode AZ” that can be changed based on operating at least one of the left part 192A and the right part 194A of the second production button 19A. It is a production mode that is set.
The “effect mode AX” is an effect mode in which a background image (not shown) of “mountain” is displayed as a background image, and a fluctuating effect is output that outputs BGM consisting only of a melody sound. In the “effect mode AX”, three types of additional effects (“development notice AX”, “line notice AX”, and “decision effect AX”) described later can be executed. This “additional effect” is an effect (notice effect, determined effect) in which execution (◯) or non-execution (×) is associated with each variation effect pattern (see FIGS. 38 to 40 later). As will be described later, the sub CPU 102a determines the type of additional effect to be executed during the variable effect by lottery according to the execution ratio (%) associated with the variable effect pattern shown in FIGS. 41, 43, and 45. .

The “production mode AY” displays a background image (not shown) of “beach” as a background image, and in addition to the melody sound played by the same musical instrument as the musical instrument playing the melody sound in the production mode AX, This is an effect mode for executing a fluctuating effect that outputs BGM having a rhythm sound. In the “effect mode AY”, four types of additional effects (“character notice AY”, “development notice AY”, “line notice AY”, and “decision effect AY”) described later can be executed.
The “production mode AZ” displays a background image (not shown) of “town” as a background image, and a BGM consisting only of a melody sound played by an instrument different from the instrument that plays the melody sound in the production mode AX. This is an effect mode to output. In this “direction mode AZ”, five types of additional effects described later (“character notice AZ (1)”, “character notice AZ (2)”, “development notice AZ”, “serif notice AZ”, “decisive effect AZ”). )).
When the production modes AX to AZ are changed by the player's operation, the background image, BGM, and type of additional production are changed.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown).

  Further, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) when the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, or when winning a small hit.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes special symbol stop symbol data reflecting the result of the special symbol determination and the type of the special symbol display device that operates in the special symbol display (the start port related to the special symbol display), and the special symbol The number of holds (U1 or U2), the reach determination value for determining presence / absence of reach, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern are stored.

  When the special figure stop symbol data is “10H” to “17H”, or “20H”, “21H” (big hit, small hit), the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is the first start port 6 or the second start port. The special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number acquired in response to entering the ball 7 is compared with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data. To decide.

  Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H” (losing), the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure pending number (U1 or U2) related to the special figure variation pattern determination process. . The main CPU 101a obtains a random number for reach determination, compares it with the reach determination value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), or the special figure variation pattern of “unreach without reach”, Alternatively, it is determined whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach with reach”.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “unreach without reach”, the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “unreach without reach”. Then, the special figure variation pattern is determined.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “losing with reach”, the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “losing with reach”. Then, the special figure variation pattern is determined.

  The main CPU 101a executes a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313) at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display (at the time of the special symbol memory judgment process in step S310), and determines the special figure fluctuation pattern.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for the special symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation time”). The special symbol variation pattern includes a first special symbol variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a first special symbol variation pattern which is displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure variation pattern which is a mode of variation display of two special symbols.

  The main CPU 101 a generates a special symbol variation pattern designation command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and transmits the command to the effect control board 102.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has an expected degree of reliability (reliability) and a specific jackpot (for example, The degree of expectation (reliability) to be won is associated with the first jackpot and the second jackpot.

  As the content of the effect determined by the sub CPU 102a, “symbol variation” means that a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 14.

  In addition, “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of jackpot, such that a part of the combination of special performance symbols that inform the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other special effects symbols fluctuate. Means. For example, when the combination of special effect symbols of “777” is set as a combination of special effect symbols for notifying the jackpot, the two special effect symbols are temporarily stopped at “7”, and the remaining special effect symbols are displayed. It means an aspect in which the production symbol is changing. The “temporary stop” refers to an aspect in which the special effect symbol is changed to the player because the special effect symbol is slightly shaken or deformed.

  The “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are variation effects in which “losing” is notified as a determination result of the jackpot determination without a reach mode after a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. The “symbol variation 1” is a “shortening variation” performed in a very short special symbol variation time of 4 seconds. The “symbol variation 2” and “symbol variation 3” are variation effects performed with special symbol variation times of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

  In addition, “normal reach” is a reach effect in which two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. It is a variation effect to be performed, such as the effect that the hero character goes on a battle journey.

  Further, “normal reach → story reach” is a fluctuating effect that is executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot. This “normal reach → story reach” is a normal reach that stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation that variably displays a plurality of special effect symbols. After that, story reach is performed as a reach production with a higher expectation of jackpot than normal reach. This story reach suggests that the decision result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the jackpot by going on a journey to find the dog that disappeared in the following challenge reach, and finding the dog at the end It is a reach production consisting of a story of the contents.

  “Pseudo-ream 2 → Challenge reach” is a fluctuating effect that is executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit. This “pseudo-ream 2 → challenge reach” stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special performance symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol change including two pseudo-reams. The character that appears in Story Reach also challenges the treasure hunt game in which a target item is searched for from a plurality of treasure chests, and the character wins the item to determine that the result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or jackpot It is a challenge reach with the content of suggesting.

  “Pseudo-ream 3 → challenge reach” is a variation effect in which the challenge reach is performed after the symbol variation including three pseudo-reams.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach” is a normal reach in which two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of special effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. After that, it is a fluctuating effect that performs super reach with higher expectation for jackpot than normal reach. This super-reach is, for example, an effect in which a hero character that appears in special reach also fights an enemy character. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the hero character defeats the enemy character, and the jackpot If the determination result of the determination is a loss, the effect is that the main character is defeated by the enemy character.

  In addition, “normal reach → special reach” temporarily displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. This is a fluctuating effect in which a normal reach is performed and then a special reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than the above-described super reach is performed. This special reach is, for example, when a hero character that appears in Super Reach battles with an enemy character that is different from the enemy character that appears in Super Reach, and the jackpot determination result is a jackpot The effect is such that when the main character defeats the enemy character and the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost, the main character is defeated by the enemy character.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” is a variation in which after performing the above-described normal reach after performing the above-described normal reach after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special performance symbols are variably displayed, and thereafter performing the above-described special reach. Production.

As can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined when the stop symbol data is “10H” is “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH”, and “E6H0CH”. As the selection rate increases. Similarly, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of the second jackpot whose stop symbol data is “11H” is “E6H0DH”, “E6H0EH”, “E6H0FH” as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. ", The selection ratio increases.
On the other hand, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined when the stop symbol data is “18H” is “E6H09H”, “E6H08H”, and “E6H07H” as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination value. As the selection rate decreases.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH” as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach” of “variation rendering pattern AX021” and “variation rendering pattern AX022” in the rendering mode AX described later. In the effect mode AY, it is determined to execute “normal reach → super reach” of the “change effect pattern AY021” and the “change effect pattern AY022”. In the effect mode AZ, It is determined to execute “normal reach → super reach” of “pattern AZ021” and “variation effect pattern AZ022”.

  When “E6H0BH” is received as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern AX023” and “variation effect pattern AX024” is executed in the effect mode AX described later. In the production mode AY, it is decided to execute “normal reach → special reach” of “variation production pattern AY023” and “variation production pattern AY024”, and in the production mode AZ, “fluctuation production pattern AZ023”, It is decided to execute “normal reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern AZ024”.

  When “E6H0CH” is received as a variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern AX025” and “variation effect pattern AX026” in the effect mode AX described later. In the effect mode AY, it is determined that “normal reach → super reach → special reach” of the “change effect pattern AY025” and “change effect pattern AY026” is executed. In the effect mode AZ, It is determined to execute “normal reach → super reach → special reach” of “variation effect pattern AZ025” and “variation effect pattern AZ026”.

Later, as the variation effects of the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the variation effects of “variation effect pattern AX021”, “variation effect pattern AX023”, and “variation effect pattern AX025” are given as examples. I will explain.
When the expectation degree for the big hit of “variation effect pattern AX021”, “variation effect pattern A023”, “variation effect pattern A025” is described, as can be seen from the selection ratio of “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH”, and “E6H0CH” described above, “Variation effect pattern AX021” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH”, “Fluctuation effect” of “normal reach → special reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0BH” It can be said that as the pattern AX023 ”and the“ variable effect pattern AX025 ”of“ normal reach → super reach ”executed when the sub CPU 102a receives“ E6H0CH ”, the expectation for the big hit increases.

  In the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, a dedicated special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) is selected. The production mode B is set in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. In the special figure variation pattern determination table selected in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, special variation patterns corresponding to, for example, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are performed as variation effects executed in the rendering mode B. However, these “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are variation effects performed at special symbol variation times of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. Special symbol variation time 4 seconds, 8 seconds when executing “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the probabilistic gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, It is shorter than 12 seconds.

In addition, the selection ratio of the special figure fluctuation pattern for executing the “symbol fluctuation 1” having the shortest special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds is “the special figure fluctuation time of 4 seconds shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of the special figure fluctuation pattern for executing “symbol fluctuation 1”.
Further, as another variation effect executed in the effect mode B, after “symbol variation” for displaying a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner, a special character reach by a special character appearing only in the effect mode B described later is performed. Fluctuation → Special character reach ”.

  A start winning designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special symbol variation pattern designation command is 1 byte for identifying the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. As for the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E7H”, 2 It shows that the special symbol display device 21 displays the variation of the special symbol.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is “E6H” is called “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is “E7H” is “second”. This is called a “special pattern variation pattern designation command”.

  The start winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. With respect to the start winning designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the game is input to the second start port 7. Indicates that a ball has entered. The start winning designation command with MODE data “E1H” is referred to as “first start winning designation command”, and the starting winning designation command with MODE data “E2H” is referred to as “second start winning designation command”.

  FIG. 10A to FIG. 10F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol game based on winning to the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that involves opening the second start port 7. As described later, the winning determination is performed based on a random number for winning determination acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the first winning gate 9 and the second winning gate 10.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-short-time gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-short gaming state.

  In each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired hit determination random number with the hit determination table, either “win” or “lost” is determined. When “winning” is won, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 7 is executed.

  FIG.10 (b) is a figure which shows an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the result of winning determination (winning and losing).

  Each normal symbol determination table stores a normal symbol determination value and a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the normal symbol determining random number acquired when the game ball passes through the first winning gate 9 and the second winning gate 10 is collated with the normal symbol determining table, and is normally displayed. The symbol is determined. As the normal symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 10C determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display the variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The common figure variation pattern determination table is composed of a common figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-short-time gaming state and a common figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the short-time gaming state.

  In each table, a common pattern variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of common map variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by comparing the random number for determining the normal variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes the first winning gate 9 and the second winning gate 10 with the normal variation pattern determination table, A figure variation pattern is determined.

  A command change pattern designation command is set corresponding to the command map change pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal pattern variation pattern is determined. When the production control board 102 receives the normal pattern variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the normal symbol is started from now on, and the determination result of the normal symbol determination related to the variation display of the normal symbol is recognized. Can do.

  The usual pattern change pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the gaming state related to the current start opening winning ease, and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the usual figure change pattern. Yes. With respect to the usual variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “D6H”, it represents a non-short-time gaming state, and if the MODE data is “D7H”, it represents a time-short gaming state.

  FIG. 10D shows an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start port winning easiness and the normal stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the normal symbol determination when the normal symbol determination is performed.

  FIG. 10E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control opening / closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 10F is a diagram showing an example of a second start port opening / closing control table for auxiliary games used when controlling opening / closing of the second start port 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, a general electric operation number (D) which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) number of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, 2 Opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Explanation of special game types)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game involving the opening of the big winning opening 8 (the operation of the big winning opening control device 80) is “big hit game” and “small hit” which are executed when “big hit” is won. It is composed of “small hit game” that is executed when winning. The jackpot game is divided into a “first jackpot game”, a “second jackpot game”, and a “third jackpot game” mainly depending on the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason that “can be opened” is that the number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the grand prize winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times of opening, the big winning prize opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 is closed and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each jackpot game.

(Description of game conditions)
Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, jackpot winning probabilities and start port winning easiness are set as game conditions. As for the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, and the game ball progresses under the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state with respect to the ease of winning the game opening. To do. The initial (power-on) gaming conditions are set to a low probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, and this low probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the low probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to be disadvantageous to the player at 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, set to 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in a high probability gaming state, winning a jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of winning jackpots per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the start opening winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-short-time gaming state, the time required for the normal symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as the normal figure change time) is set to 15 seconds, and is activated when “winning” is won in the hit determination. 2 The total operation time of the starting port control device 70 (opening time of the second starting port 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is 1 / It is set to 50. Note that the “total opening time” is that the second starting port 7 may be opened multiple times per win, and a game ball can be won per win. This is because the number is limited, and when a game ball is won, it closes without waiting for the opening time.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting port control device 70) is longer than in the non-short-time gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Is a gaming state that tends to be open. Due to the relatively high start opening prize ease, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be performed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the normal variation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice via a 1.0 second closure (interval). However, there is no such closure, and it may be opened only once. Moreover, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 6 and the second start port 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player can operate the appropriate launch handle 32. Even when game balls are fired, the number of game balls possessed by the player is likely to decrease. However, in the short-time gaming state, since it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-short-time gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the short-time game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-short-time game state.

  In this way, the jackpot game type (first to third jackpot games) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low probability game state or high probability game state, non-short game state, by winning the jackpot Or a combination with the short-time gaming state). In view of this, the substantial jackpot type (the jackpot type based on the profits enjoyed by the player) includes the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game ends ( It can be said that it is a combination with (gaming state). Therefore, hereinafter, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game derived by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of profit that the player enjoys The jackpot type can be classified.

  By winning the jackpot, the jackpot game with the number of rounds of 16R (round) (the first jackpot game (also referred to as “16R jackpot game”)) is executed, and then the jackpot that is set to the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. It is called “first jackpot”, and by winning the jackpot, a jackpot game (“second jackpot game” (also called “8R jackpot game”)) with a round number of 4R (round) is executed, and then a high probability game. The jackpot that is set to the state and the short-time gaming state is referred to as “second jackpot”, and by winning the jackpot, the jackpot game with 2R (round) rounds (“third jackpot game” (also referred to as “2R jackpot game”)). The jackpot that is set to the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after that is called “third jackpot”.

  If the jackpot is won, the normal game state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state are entered. On the other hand, even if winning a small win, the game conditions do not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads a startup program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to power-on. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command indicating that the initialization process has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S800 described later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including an initial value random number for jackpot determination, an initial value random number for special symbol determination, an initial value random number for hit determination, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game variable counter update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an open / close time update process for the special winning opening 8, and the like. And the time control process which updates the auxiliary | assistant game timer counter which performs the update process of the change time of a normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of a normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the 2nd start port 7, etc. is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number including a jackpot determining random number, a special symbol determining random number, and a winning determining random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determining initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the winning determination initial value random number.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. In the update of the random number, when the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is reset to “0” without adding “1”, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. Update to

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a performs the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the special prize opening control device 80. Special symbol special electric power control processing (special symbol system processing) for performing the above control (control of special symbol system device). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal signal normal power control process (normal signal control) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Perform symbolic processing.

  The main CPU 101a loads the value of the general-purpose power transmission processing data in the normal-time normal power control processing (ordinary symbol system processing) and refers to the branch address from the loaded general-purpose power transmission processing data. If the process data = 0, is the auxiliary game executed (the second start port 7 is opened) based on the normal determination information acquired based on the winning to the first winning gate 9 and the second winning gate 10? If normal symbol memory determination processing including normal symbol determination or the like of whether or not is performed and the normal symbol normal power processing data = 1, the normal symbol change when the normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuating based on the normal symbol determination If the normal symbol display data 22 is set, the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped. 7 is controlled to open and close (the second start port control device 70 Performing dynamic) to assist game process.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the winning ball counters corresponding to the starting port (the first starting port 6 and the second starting port 7), the big winning port 8 and the general winning port 11 have exceeded “0”. If it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a performs an error control process based on the occurrence of an error designated in advance in the gaming machine Y. Details of the error control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a, external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B, and the prize winning port opening / closing solenoid. Drive control data for driving 80B (start opening / closing solenoid drive data and special prize opening / closing solenoid drive data), first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21, first special symbol hold display Display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold) for displaying a predetermined symbol on the device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the normal symbol hold display device 25 Display data) is created.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S700 is performed. Next, in order to turn on the LEDs of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display devices 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25, a signal is output based on the display control data created in S700. Display device output processing to be performed. Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S900, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a updates the general winning opening prize ball counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 8a has been inputted, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 8. When the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it, and wins the big winning opening 8. The counter value of the big winning opening prize counter (C) for counting the number of played balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a inputs detection signals from the first winning gate detection sensor 9a and the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, that is, the game ball passes through the first winning gate 9 and the second winning gate 10. Determine whether or not. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal (NO in step S231), the process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal (YES in step S231), the process proceeds to step S232. 1 "is added and updated, and the first starting port winning flag is turned ON in the first starting port entering flag storage area of the main RAM 101c (first starting port winning process).

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not less than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure hold in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is updated by adding “1”. In step S234, the main CPU 101a displays special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds in the main RAM 101c in order to update the first special figure hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a receives the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number counter as the first special information. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

  The first special symbol storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a performs the first preliminary determination based on the game ball entering the first start port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, The first special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure fluctuation pattern as the first pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (S313).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first start winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a updates the start opening prize ball counter by adding “1”, updates the second start opening entrance ball regulation counter by adding “1”, and also updates the second start opening of the main RAM 101c. The second starting entrance ball flag is turned ON in the winning flag storage area. The second starting entrance counting rule counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting entrance 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for a single auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter for counting the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure pending number counter and updates it. Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 in step S244 to display the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a receives the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special pattern variation pattern determination random number counter as the second special information. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

  The second special symbol reserved storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and various random numbers are assigned numbers in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination based on the entrance into the 2nd starting port 7 in step S246. Here, the second prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, A second special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure fluctuation pattern as the second pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313).

  In step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second start winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure variation pattern determined in the second pre-determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  Next, winning gate detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether there is a valid detection signal from the first winning gate detection sensor 9a and the second winning gate detection sensor 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter for counting the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S253.

  In step S 253, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the usual figure holding number counter and updates it. In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold number (G). set.

  In step S254, the main CPU 101a stores the random numbers indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the normal variation pattern determination random number counter in the normal symbol holding storage area, and performs the winning gate detection signal input process. Exit.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11 (c)), and various random numbers are stored in a storage unit having a small number among storage units in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11D).

  Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch destination address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310). ), The process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step S330) if the special symbol special electric treatment data = 2. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process moves to the big hit game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 4, the process moves to the small hit game process (step S350). If the process data = 5, the process goes to the jackpot game end process (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the main CPU 101a ends the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold count counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. The data stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (the 0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting “1” in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. I do.

  For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Is done. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the data shift process (the suspension digestion process) in step S310-6, specifically, In order to change the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data, the first and second special symbol hold display data are changed. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted in priority to the first special symbol reserved storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-6. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in the order of entering, or the first special symbol reserved storage area is shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. You may let them.

  In Step S310-4, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the processing is shifted to the customer waiting state setting processing in Step S319-1 to Step S319-3. First, in step S319-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. When the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and when the demonstration determination flag “01H” is not set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. The process moves to step S319-2. The main CPU 101a sets a customer waiting command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c based on the internal standby state (customer waiting state) described above.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demo determination flag “01H” in the demo determination flag storage area so that the demo designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a demonstration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes jackpot determination processing based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the 0th storage unit.

The jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed based on a jackpot determination random number obtained when a game ball enters the first start port 6. judge.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is the first start port 6, the first special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines that it is not the first start port 6 (is the second start port 7) in step S311-1, the second special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects “from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3”. The “first high probability jackpot determination table” or the “second high probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the “first low probability” is further selected from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. “Big jackpot determination table” or “Second low probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6”. It is compared with the “decision table” or the “low-probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big jackpot”, “small jackpot”, or “losing”, and the jackpot determination process ends.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

The special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning in step S312-3. If it is not determined that it is a “hit”, step S312— The process is moved to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “small jackpot”. If it is determined that the “small hit” is determined, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-4. If the main CPU 101a does not determine “small hit”, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-5.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol determination random number value shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for winning the jackpot (FIG. 5 (a)). The special symbol to be determined is determined.

  In step 312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. The special symbol for determining the small hit special symbol by comparing the random number for determining the special symbol in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for winning a small bonus (FIG. 5B). Make a decision.

  In step 312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol determination random number value shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for loss (FIG. 5C) to determine the special symbol for loss. Perform special symbol determination.

  In step S312-6, a special effect symbol designating command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, S312-4, and S312-5, and the determined special effect symbol designating command is effected. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-7, the main CPU 101a determines stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol stop” based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5. In other words, the special symbol type is determined, and the determined special symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  As will be described later, when the special figure change pattern is determined in the special figure change pattern determination process of FIG. 22, the determined special figure stop pattern data is displayed in the special symbol stop process of FIG. When determining “special symbol” or the like, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG. 25 or the small hit game process of FIG.

  In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a compares the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a game condition data determination table corresponding to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special condition stop symbol data is collated with the selected game condition data determination table to determine the game condition data and store it in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination, the time required for the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol variation time”) and A special-figure variation pattern including information related to an effect type or the like of a variation effect described later is determined.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to ON / OFF of the high probability flag and ON / OFF of the short time flag in the gaming condition determination table of FIG. Gaming state or low-probability gaming state, short-time gaming state or non-short-time gaming state).

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a selects a special figure variation pattern determination table according to the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1. Here, when the confirmed gaming state is the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a determines the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG. 9, and the confirmed gaming state is the high probability gaming state and In the case of the short-time gaming state, a special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) dedicated to the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is determined.

  In step S313-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is “lost”, the main CPU 101a further displays the special symbol related to the special symbol variation pattern determination process. Check the number of holds (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a acquires the reach determination random number, compares it with the reach determination random number value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), and the special chart of “no reach loss”. It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern of “losing with reach”.

  In step S313-4, the main CPU 101a performs special figure variation pattern determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a acquires a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number, and acquires the acquired special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number and a determination value (0 to 255) stored in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. Collate and determine the special figure fluctuation pattern.

When the main CPU 101a determines the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19, and in step S310-7, the special graphic variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted for the effect in the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 102. Upon receiving this command, the production control board 102 recognizes that the special symbol fluctuation display starts, and finally the special figure fluctuation pattern. Based on the variation pattern designated by the designation command, the variation production pattern associated with the content of the variation production is determined.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the gaming condition at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and sets a gaming state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure change time associated with the special figure change pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data in order to perform variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the demonstration determination flag storage area, that is, clears the demonstration determination flag storage area, and sets special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol memory determination process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special symbol variation time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display does not end, the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop symbol data set in step S312-13 in order to stop and display the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21. Set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first starting port winning flag or the second starting port winning flag, and ends the special symbol variation process.

Next, the special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol stop display ends, in other words, whether or not the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed ( Special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display does not end, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol stop processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2. Move processing.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the hourly flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time-short flag storage area means that the current state is the time-short game state. If the flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is turned off in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a calculates “1” from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the short time gaming state indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol change display according to the short time gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of short time gaming states”). The operation value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "is stored as the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J) = 0. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining time-short gaming state remaining number (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. It should be noted that the fact that the short time gaming state remaining number (J) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times (Ja) in the short time gaming state. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability gaming state. If the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is OFF in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of high-probability gaming states”). The operation value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new high probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state, and the special symbol based on the “high probability” state. This means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming condition, and sets a gaming state designation command indicating the gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area. The gaming state designation command includes information on the remaining short time gaming state (J) and the remaining number of high gaming state states (X) stored in step S330-3 in addition to information on the current gaming state.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). To do. If it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-14. If the jackpot special symbol is not determined, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, when it is determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-17, and when it is not determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special symbol special electricity processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the gaming condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high-probability flag storage area), the remaining variation counter for the high-probability gaming state, and the remaining variation counter for the time-short gaming state. To do.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and moves the process to step S330-16.

Next, the jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The term “opening” as used herein refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, which jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the long winning game winning prize opening / closing control table or the short winning game winning prize opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a stores the currently stored value (round number (R) in the round game number storage area for storing the value (round number (R)) indicating the round game number of jackpot games in the main RAM 101c. )) Is added with "1" and stored. Since the round game has not been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game count storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the currently stored value (the special electric operation number (K)) in the special electric operation number storage area for storing the special electric operation number (K) in the main RAM 101c. Remember. The main CPU 101a sets the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to energize the big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B and open the big prize opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special operation number (K), the opening time ( Set the special game timer counter). The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special electric operation number (K) in the special electric operation number storage area is K = 1. If K = 1, it is stored in the round game number storage area. Based on the round number (R), a round designation command for designating the number of round games to be started (round game times) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first release of the first round game per long game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, an effect display is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of all preset round games (after the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is completed) to the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the big prize opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the big prize opening control device 80 is in operation. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is being opened, it determines in step S340-8 whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the big prize opening 8 is satisfied. To do. As this “opening end condition”, the counter value of the big prize winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum open time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). Is adopted). If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening determined in step 340-3 is performed. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the big prize winning prize counter is a specified number (for example, 9), it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is ended.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the special winning opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electric operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the big prize winning prize counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and an ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 to the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG.

  Next, the small hit game processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently open. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a big winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the big prize opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the special operation number storage area (special operation number (K)) and stored. Then, in order to open the special winning opening 8, the energization start data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set, and the current special operation is performed with reference to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3. The opening time of the special winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here means the period from the end of opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-13 when it is determined that it is currently ending, and moves to step S350-6 when it is determined that it is not currently ending.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-10, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is open, in step S350-7. Then, it is determined whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the big prize winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, nine), or the time for opening the big winning prize 8 once has passed (special game) Timer counter = 0) is adopted. If the main CPU 101a determines that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-8, and if it determines that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. To do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the large winning opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3 is referred to. Based on the current special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game ending condition is satisfied. The small hit game ending condition is that the special winning operation number (K) is the number of times the special winning opening 8 is set in advance or the counter value (C) of the special winning prize winning counter is a predetermined number (for example, nine) ). When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-11. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is not satisfied, the main hit game process. Exit.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” to the special operation number storage area and sets “0” to the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game ending process. That is, the special electric operation number storage area and the big prize winning prize counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hits in the effect transmission data storage area based on the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending time according to the type of small hits. Is set in the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and when it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that the game is not done, the small hit game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special figure special electricity processing data.

Next, the jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-4. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, in step S360-3, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and the executable number (Xa) (84 times in this embodiment) is set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time flag is turned on in the time flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-6. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is turned ON, the time reduction flag (01H) is set in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time, the number of executable times (Ja) (84 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time-saving gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the current game condition state, sets a game state designation command indicating the current game condition state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S360-7 The special electric processing data is set to 0, and the processing moves to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

Next, the error control process will be described with reference to FIG.
As described above, in the present embodiment, “abnormal winning error”, “magnetic detection error”, “door open error”, and “lower plate full error” are designated in advance as errors in the gaming machine Y. In the main ROM 101b, an error list (not shown) having information of “abnormal winning error”, “magnetic detection error”, “door open error”, and “bottom plate full error” specified in advance in the gaming machine Y is stored. ) Is stored.

  The “abnormal winning error” means that a game ball has won a prize at the big winning opening 8 except when the big winning opening 8 is opened (closed), and when the second starting opening 7 is not opened (closed). When the game ball wins at the second starting port 7 except when the door 7 is opened (when closed), it is regarded as an abnormal winning error. This “abnormal winning error” is an error (priority: E-1) having the highest priority as the importance to be notified to the player.

  “Magnetic detection error” is an error detected when a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) connected to the main control board 101 detects a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and the player uses a magnet. This is to prevent illegal games from being played. This “magnetic detection error” is an error having the second highest priority (priority: E-2) as the importance to be notified to the player.

  “Door open error” is an error that the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 are opened by opening the glass door Y2 supported by the game board mounting frame Y1 (door opening). This is the error with the third highest priority (priority: E-3).

  The “lower plate full error” is an error that occurs when the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 5 and stored in the lower plate (not shown) are filled with the lower plate and are not discharged to the outside. This “bottom-dish full error” is an error that is unlikely to be directly related to a player's fraud, and occurs mainly during a big hit game due to a player's omission. Is eliminated by the player pressing the discharge button U11 to remove the game ball from the lower plate. For this reason, the “bottom pan full error” is the error with the lowest priority (priority: E-4).

In step S370-1, the main CPU 101a generates an error specified based on the input error detection signal among errors specified in advance in the gaming machine Y in the error occurrence flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. It is determined whether or not an error occurrence flag indicating that is set to ON. This error occurrence flag is set to ON when the main CPU 101a inputs an error detection signal for any one of previously specified errors, and is set to OFF when an error notification cancellation condition described later is satisfied. .
Here, the “error occurrence flag storage area” includes “abnormal winning error occurrence flag storage area”, “magnetic detection error occurrence flag storage area”, “door open error occurrence flag storage area”, “lower pan full error occurrence flag storage”. Each storage area has "abnormal winning error occurrence flag", "magnetic detection error occurrence flag", "door open error occurrence flag", and "lower pan full error occurrence flag" as error occurrence flags. Is set to ON or OFF.

  For example, the main CPU 101a detects the detection signal detected by the special winning opening detection sensor 8a other than when the special winning opening 8 is opened (closed) or the second signal other than when the second start opening 7 is opened (closed). When the detection signal detected by the start port detection sensor 7a is input as an abnormal winning error detection signal, the abnormal winning error occurrence flag is set to ON in the abnormal winning error occurrence flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  Further, for example, the main CPU 101a detects a magnetic detection signal indicating that a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold from the magnetic detection sensor other than when the special winning opening 8 is opened (when closed), or the second start opening 7 When a magnetic detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor other than when the battery is open (closed) is input as a magnetic detection error detection signal, the magnetic detection error occurrence flag is set to ON in the magnetic detection error occurrence flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  The main CPU 101a detects a door detection signal indicating that the opening (door opening) of the front portion of the gaming board mounting frame Y1 detected by a door opening detection sensor (not shown) connected to the main control board 101 is detected. When input as an error detection signal, the door opening error occurrence flag is set to ON in the door opening error occurrence flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  The main CPU 101a uses, as a lower pan full tank error detection signal, a detection signal detected by a full tank detection sensor (not shown) of the payout control board 103 connected to the main control board 101 to the effect that the lower pan is full. When input, the lower pan full tank error occurrence flag storage area sets the lower pan full tank error occurrence flag to ON.

  An abnormal winning error, a magnetic detection error, and a door opening error are all errors that are highly likely to be directly related to an illegal act by a player. Therefore, in the sound information table shown in FIG. 83, “error notification sound 1” (sound number: E1) for notifying an abnormal winning error, “error notification sound 2” (sound number: E2) for notifying a magnetic detection error, Any of “error notification sound 3” (sound number: E3) for notifying the door opening error is output at an output volume that is larger than the output volume of the effect sound and cannot be changed by the player.

  Further, as described above, the lower plate full tank error is an error that is solved by the player pressing the discharge button U11 and removing the game ball from the lower plate, and is the lowest priority error. For this reason, the “error notification sound 4” for reporting the lower pan full tank error is output at a variable volume.

  As described above, in the sound reproduction area of the VDP 105Ba, “ch0” to “ch3” are fixed channels used for reproducing the error notification sound. “Ch0” includes monaural data of “error notification sound 1” (sound number: E1) for notifying an abnormal winning error, and “ch2” is “error notification sound 2” (sound number: for sound detection error). The monaural data of E2) is “ch3”, the “error notification sound 3” (sound number: E3) is informed of the door opening error, and “ch4” is the “error notification of bottom plate full tank error” Monaural data of “Sound 4” (sound number: E4) is stored in a “stop” state in advance.

As will be described later, when an error occurs, the error notification sound is reproduced in the channel designated by the reproduction instruction of the error notification sound of the error that has occurred.
In addition, when a plurality of errors are occurring, the liquid crystal display device 14 displays a notification image for notifying each of the errors that are occurring, but from the sound output device 15, among the plurality of errors that are occurring Only the error notification sound of the error having the highest priority is output.

  In this step S370-1, when the main CPU 101a determines that any of the abnormal winning error occurrence flag, the magnetic detection error occurrence flag, the door opening error occurrence flag, and the lower pan full error occurrence flag is set to ON. Advances the process to step S370-5, and if it determines that any error occurrence flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), the process advances to step S370-2.

  In step S370-2, the main CPU 101a inputs an abnormal winning error detection signal, a magnetic detection error detection signal, a door opening error detection signal, or a lower pan full error detection signal, and is specified by the input error detection signal. If it is determined that an error (abnormal winning error, magnetism detection error, door opening error, or lower pan full error) has occurred, the process proceeds to step S370-3 and any error detection signal is input. If it is determined that no error has occurred, the error control process is terminated.

  In step S370-3, the main CPU 101a specifies an error designation command (abnormal winning error designation command, magnetism detection error designation command, door opening error designation command, or lower) that designates the error determined to have occurred in step S370-2. A full dish error designation command) is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c. The error designation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa of the image control board 105 and the lamp CPU 104a of the lamp control board 104 via the liquid crystal control board 102.

In step S370-4, the main CPU 101a sets the error occurrence flag of the error determined to have occurred in step S370-2 to ON in the corresponding error occurrence flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.
For example, if the main CPU 101a determines in step S370-2 that an abnormal winning error has occurred, the main CPU 101a sets the abnormal winning error occurrence flag to ON in the abnormal winning error occurrence flag storage area, and a magnetic detection error has occurred. Is set to ON in the magnetic detection error occurrence flag storage area, and if it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, the door opening error in the door opening error occurrence storage area When the occurrence flag is set to ON and it is determined that a lower plate full tank error has occurred, the lower plate full tank error occurrence flag is set to ON in the lower plate full tank error occurrence flag storage area.

  When an abnormal winning error, a magnetic detection error, a door opening error, or a lower pan full error occurs, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and VDP 105Ba of the image control board 105 are generated from the main control board 101 transmitted in step S370-3. An error designation command for an error is received, a notification image for notifying that an error indicated by the error designation command is occurring is displayed on the image display device 14, and an error indicated by the error designation command is occurring. The sound output device 15 is controlled to output an error notification sound for informing the user.

  As described above, as error notification sounds, “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1), “error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection error)” (sound number in descending order of error priority. : E2), "Error notification sound 3 (door opening error)" (sound number: E3), and "Error notification sound 4 (lower pan full error)" (sound number: E4). For example, when there are a plurality of errors that are occurring, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa transmits an error notification sound reproduction command for the plurality of errors to the VDP 105Ba, but the VDP 105Ba generates an error notification sound for the highest priority error. Control to output from the sound output device 15 with priority.

The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa gradually reduces the output volume of the effect sound from the current output volume to the FO execution time (FO processing execution time: for example, 0.5 seconds) together with the error notification sound reproduction command. An FO instruction command for instructing this is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.
Here, the error notification sounds are “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1), “error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection error)” (sound number: E2), “error notification sound 3 (door (Open error) ”(sound number: E3), an FO command for gradually reducing the output volume of the effect sound being output to 0% (mute) is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba, If the error notification sound is “Error notification sound 4 (bottom plate full error)” (sound number: E4), the output volume of the effect sound being output is increased to 20% or 50%. An FO command for gradually decreasing is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

In step S370-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not an error notification cancellation condition for canceling the notification of the error that has occurred is satisfied.
In step S370-5, the main CPU 101a notifies a predetermined error such as the elapse of a predetermined period, the cancellation of an error that has occurred by a shop clerk, a player, or the like. When it is determined whether the cancellation condition is satisfied and it is determined that the error notification cancellation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S370-6, and when it is determined that the error notification cancellation condition is not satisfied. Then, the error control process ends.

  In step S370-6, the main CPU 101a specifies an error notification cancel designation command (an abnormal winning error notification cancel designation command, a magnetic detection error notification cancel designation command, a door opening error notification cancel designation command) for designating cancellation of an error that has occurred. Or lower pan full error notification canceling designation command) is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c. When any error notification cancel designation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted from the main control board 101 to the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa of the image control board 105 via the effect control board 102, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa cancels the error notification. A stop command for stopping the reproduction of the error notification sound whose release is specified by the specified command is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  Based on the error notification sound stop command, the VDP 105Ba displays “stop information” indicating that playback is to be stopped, in the sound playback area of the VRAM 105Be, the “playback” of the channel dedicated to the error notification sound specified by the stop command. It is stored in the “status” storage area. Thereby, the reproduction of the error notification sound being reproduced is stopped.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa gradually raises the output volume of the production sound from the current output volume to the FI execution time (FI processing execution time: 0.5 seconds, for example) together with the error notification sound stop command. When the FI is finished, the ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the sound data of the production sound is multiplied by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be to obtain an output volume. An FI instruction command for instructing is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  Here, the error notification sounds are “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1), “error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection error)” (sound number: E2), “error notification sound 3 (door Release error) ”(sound number: E3), the output volume of the effect sound being output is gradually increased from 0% (mute) to the original volume before the error notification sound is output. FI (fade in) command is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba, and if the error notification sound is “error notification sound 4 (lower plate full error)” (sound number: E4), the output volume of the effect sound being output Then, an FI command for increasing the volume to the original volume before the error notification sound is output is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

In step S370-7, the main CPU 101a sets the error occurrence flag of the error that satisfies the error notification release condition in step S370-5 to OFF in the error occurrence flag storage area of the main RAM 101c, and ends the error control process. .
For example, if the main CPU 101a determines in step S370-5 that the error notification cancellation condition for the abnormal winning error is satisfied, the main CPU 101a sets the abnormal winning error occurrence flag to OFF in the abnormal winning error occurrence flag storage area, and magnetically When it is determined that the error notification cancellation condition for the detection error is satisfied, the magnetic detection error occurrence flag is set to OFF in the magnetic detection error occurrence flag storage area, and it is determined that the error notification cancellation condition for the door opening error is satisfied. In this case, the door opening error occurrence flag is set to OFF in the door opening error occurrence flag storage area, and if it is determined that the error notification release condition of the lower dish full tank error is satisfied, the lower dish full tank error occurrence flag storage area The lower plate full tank error occurrence flag is set to OFF.

(Main processing by production control board)
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b and initializes the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored.

  In step S <b> 1002, the sub CPU 102 a performs a process of updating the effect random number used for controlling the effect including the random effect determination random number, the variable effect pattern determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized, different initial value random numbers are provided to the various production random numbers instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, When updating the random number, if the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by production control board)
A timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 30 is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

  In this timer interrupt process, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details of this command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the effect control board 102, the sub CPU 102a performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in step S1300.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by production control board)
The command analysis processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command, it moves the process to step S1303. If it determines that the command is not a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect standby flag in the demonstration effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the time until the demonstration effect is started (demo effect standby time) in the demonstration effect timer counter. Further, the sub CPU 102a specifies that the demonstration effect is to be executed after the standby time elapses, and sets a demonstration effect control command for instructing the contents of the demonstration effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Then, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a start winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not a starting winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a executes a prefetch control process and ends the command analysis process. The prefetch control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1307, and if it determines that there is no gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1309.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for setting the gaming state by setting data indicating the gaming state indicated by the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the data set in step S1307, and ends the command analysis process.
The effect mode is a classification of variable effects performed by effect devices such as the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, and the effect accessory device 17 corresponding to the special symbol lottery (or the special symbol variable display). It is an aspect (category).

  In this step S1308, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 35) stored in the sub RAM 102c, and the gaming state indicated by the data set in step S1307 is the low probability gaming state and the non-short gaming state. If there is, the effect mode A flag corresponding to the effect mode A is stored in the effect mode A flag storage area, and the effect mode A is set. The production mode A is a production mode that is initially set when the gaming machine Y is turned on. Therefore, if a power interruption occurs in the gaming machine Y, this production mode is restored after the power interruption is restored. A is set.

In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 35) stored in the sub RAM 102c, and the gaming state and the short time gaming state remaining designated by the gaming state designation command received in step S1306. Production modes B and C are set based on the number of times (J) and the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X).
For example, the sub CPU 102a is designated by the gaming state designation command when the gaming state designated by the gaming state designation command (the gaming state indicated by the data set in step S1307) is the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. Stores the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation display (the number of special figure fluctuations) corresponding to the remaining number of short-time gaming states (J) and the high probability gaming state remaining times (X) in the effect mode remaining number counter, When the counter value is “1” to “84”, the effect mode B is set.
It should be noted that the sub CPU 102a can perform the effect mode execution number (Ma) 84 when the number of changes in the special symbol change display after the first jackpot game or after the second jackpot game is 84 times (the number of special figure changes). The counter value “84” is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter and the effect mode B is set.

  Here, the production mode executable count (Ma) indicates the number of variable productions that can be executed in the set production mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation effects that can be executed in the effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set (M: remaining number of effect modes).

Further, for example, the sub CPU 102a designates the gaming state designation command when the gaming state designated by the gaming state designation command (the gaming state indicated by the data set in step S1307) is the high probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state. The remaining number of special symbol variation display variations (special diagram variation times) corresponding to the remaining high probability gaming state remaining number (X) is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter, and the counter value is "1" to By being “84”, the production mode C is set.
It should be noted that the sub CPU 102a has a counter value “84” of the number of executions of execution mode (Ma) of 84 times when the number of changes of the special symbol change display after the third jackpot game is 84 (the number of special figure changes). Is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter and the effect mode C is set.
When the sub CPU 102a confirms that the result of the jackpot determination is a small hit based on information included in the special effect symbol designation command described later, the sub CPU 102a changes the number of changes in the special symbol variation display after the small hit game (special number). When the remaining number of times (figure fluctuation) is 84, the production mode C is set to 84 executable times (Ma).

  The sub CPU 102a updates the remaining number (M) of the effect mode by subtracting “1” from the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter every time the effect effect is executed in the effect mode B or the effect mode C. When the counter value of the mode remaining number counter becomes “0”, the effect mode is shifted from the current effect mode B or effect mode C to effect mode A.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1310. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a constitutes a special symbol lottery effect, which is performed when the special symbol stop display is being performed, and for performing a special effect symbol stop display indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. A special effect symbol pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. In the special effect design pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect design designation command and displays the special effect in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 based on the information included in the received special effect design designation command. An arrangement (combination) of decorative symbols arranged on a predetermined effective line in the stop display of symbols, that is, special effect symbols is determined.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1312, and if it determines that there is no special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1313. .

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a performs a special effect symbol variation display and a stop display on the image display device 14 as a special symbol lottery effect performed in response to the special symbol variation display and the stop display. The variation effect control process for controlling the variation effect is performed by determining the variation effect pattern of the variation effect for notifying the result of the symbol lottery, and the command analysis process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1314. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1315. .

In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating that the special effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1400. Upon receiving the special effect symbol stop control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variation effect ends, and terminate the variation effect and display the special effect symbol stop display. . Note that the end time of the production is not limited to this, and may be a specific timing related to a preset event on the production during the variation production.
In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a clears the effect data stored in the sub RAM 102c described later.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command related to a special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1316, and if it determines that there is no opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1317.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs an opening effect control process for controlling the opening effect by determining an opening effect pattern that is an aspect of the opening effect in the special game, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines the opening effect pattern based on the control content of the opening effect specified by the opening specifying command, and also displays the opening effect data indicating the effect of the determined opening effect pattern in the round effect data storage area. And an opening effect control command for controlling the effect of the determined opening effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, it moves the process to step S1318. If it determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1319.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect control process for controlling the round effect by determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines the round effect pattern based on the control content of the round effect specified by the round specification command, and stores the round effect data indicating the effect of the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area. The round effect control command for controlling the effect of the determined round effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command related to a special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1320. If it determines that the command is not an ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect control process for controlling the ending effect by determining an ending effect pattern which is an aspect of the ending effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines the ending effect pattern based on the control content of the ending effect specified by the ending specifying command, and stores the ending effect data indicating the effect of the determined ending effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area. And an ending effect control command for controlling the effect of the determined ending effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

Here, the prefetch control processing in step S1305 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1305-1, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for confirming the content of the start winning designation command received from the main control board 101. In step S1305-1, the sub CPU 102a stores a start winning designation command stored in the reception buffer in an effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c.

  The effect information storage area is provided for each type of start opening (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start winning designation command, confirms the type of the start opening (the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7) related to the start winning designation command, and produces an effect according to the type of the start opening. Store in the information storage area.

  Each effect information storage area includes a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit corresponding to each of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol storage region in the special symbol storage region of the main RAM 101c, and the above-described storage unit. The first storage unit to the fourth storage unit corresponding to each of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage region, and the 0th storage corresponding to the special symbol storage region (the 0th storage unit). It consists of parts. The start winning designation commands (first and second start winning designation commands) are the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, and the first storage unit to the fourth of the second special symbol reservation storage area. Among the storage units, the storage unit that does not store the start winning designation command is stored in order from the storage unit with the smallest number, and is stored in the 0th storage unit of the effect information storage area during the change of the special symbol. The Here, the sub CPU 102a stores the start winning designation command in the first storage unit when the special figure holding number (U1 or U2) when the starting winning designation command is received is 1, and is 2. Is stored in the second storage unit, the start winning designation command is stored in the third storage unit in the case of 3, and the start winning designation command is stored in the fourth storage unit in the case of 4. Remember.

  Each storage unit is pre-read based on the control content of the start winning designation command storage unit that stores the start winning designation command and the pre-reading effect specified by the start winning designation command stored in the start winning designation command storage unit. When performing an effect (zone effect, hold effect), an effect data storage unit that stores effect data of the contents of the prefetch effect (zone effect, hold effect) is provided.

  The sub CPU 102a confirms the start winning designation command stored in the corresponding storage unit among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the effect information storage area.

  In step S1305-2, the sub CPU 102a stores the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1 among the zone effect scenario determination tables (FIGS. 36B to 36D) stored in the sub ROM 102b. The zone effect scenario determination table corresponding to the special figure reservation number (U1 or U2) corresponding to the storage unit is referred to. Here, when the special figure hold number (U1 or U2) is 1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 1) in FIG. When (U1 or U2) is 2, refer to the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 2) in FIG. 36C, and when the special figure hold number (U1 or U2) is three. Refers to the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure reservation number = 3) of FIG. 36D, and when the special figure reservation number (U1 or U2) is 4, the zone effect scenario determination of FIG. Refer to the table (number of special figure hold = 4). In step 1305-2, the sub CPU 102a performs “zone production” according to the execution ratio (%) set in the referenced zone production scenario determination table based on the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1. Whether or not to execute is determined by lottery.

For example, as shown in the zone effect scenario determination tables of FIGS. 36B to 36E, the sub CPU 102a receives “E1H03H” to “E1H06H” and “E2H03H” to “E2H03H” to “E1H03H” from the main control board 101. When “E2H06H”, “E1H20H” to “E2H20H” are determined, it is determined not to execute the zone effect based on the determined start winning designation command.
Further, for example, as shown in the zone effect scenario determination tables of FIGS. 36B to 36E, the sub CPU 102a receives “E1H0AH” to “E1H0CH” and “E2H0AH” as start winning designation commands from the main control board 101. When “E2H0CH” is determined, it is determined to execute the zone effect with a probability of 40% based on the determined start winning designation command.

  The sub CPU 102a relates to the execution of the reach effect (at least one of normal reach, super reach, and special reach) in the storage unit having a smaller number than the storage unit that stores the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1. If there is a storage unit that stores a start winning designation command associated with a special figure variation pattern, the start winning designation command associated with the special figure variation pattern related to the execution of the reach effect is stored last. Refer to the zone effect scenario determination table corresponding to the number of special figure reservations equal to the number from any storage unit having a larger number than the storage unit to the storage unit storing the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1. To do. That is, when a reach effect is performed in the variation related to the special drawing variation pattern of the start prize designation command acquired before the start prize designation command confirmed in step S1305-1, the variation in which the reach effect is performed at the end is performed. In addition, the zone effect is executed from any later change (change that does not execute the reach effect). In this case, the sub CPU 102a determines which zone effect scenario determination table to refer to by lottery.

  For example, when the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1 is stored in the fourth storage unit, the reach effect is executed in the first storage unit and the second storage unit among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. When the start winning designation command associated with the special figure variation pattern is stored, the zone effect corresponding to the special figure hold number “2” corresponding to the number of the third storage unit and the fourth storage unit Refer to the scenario determination table (FIG. 36C) or the zone effect scenario determination table (FIG. 36B) corresponding to the special figure hold number “1” corresponding to the number of the fourth storage units.

  Alternatively, the sub CPU 102a confirms in step S1305-1 from the storage unit having a number one higher than the storage unit in which the start winning designation command associated with the special figure variation pattern related to the execution of the reach effect is last stored. You may make it refer to the zone effect scenario determination table according to the same number of special figure reservations as the number up to the storage unit storing the start winning designation command. In this case, the zone effect is executed from the change following the change in which the reach effect is finally performed (the change in which the reach effect is not executed).

  The sub CPU 102a executes the reach effect (at least one of normal reach, super reach, and special reach) in the storage unit before the storage unit storing the current start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1. When the start winning designation command associated with the special figure variation pattern is stored, it may be determined not to execute the zone effect.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone effect is to be executed in step S1305-2, the process proceeds to step S1305-3, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1305-5. Proceed.

  In step S1305-3, the sub CPU 102a follows the determination ratio (%) set in the zone effect scenario determination table referenced in step S1305-2 based on the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1. Of the zone effects (zone effect scenarios) shown in (a), a zone effect (zone effect scenario) to be executed is determined by lottery.

The “zone effect scenario 1” to “zone effect scenario 3” shown in FIG. 36A are determined by the zone effect scenario determination table (number of special figure hold = 1) in FIG. ”To“ zone effect scenario 8 ”are determined by the zone effect scenario determination table (number of reserved special drawings = 2) in FIG. 36C, and“ zone effect scenario 9 ”to“ zone effect scenario 14 ”are shown in FIG. The zone effect scenario determination table (special figure) of “zone effect scenario 15” to “zone effect scenario 20” is determined by the zone effect scenario determination table (d) of (d). The number of holds = 4).
As zone BGM that can be output by this zone effect, “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L), “zone BGM (M)” (sound number: BGM-M), “zone BGM (H)” (Sound number: BGM-H).

  “Zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) is composed of “music L” whose reliability (expectation) with respect to jackpot in the pre-determination of the reserved memory related to the start winning is low reliability (L). BGM, “Zone BGM (M)” (sound number: BGM-M) is a “music piece” whose reliability (expectation) with respect to jackpot in the pre-determination for reserved memory related to the start winning is medium reliability (M) M ”is a BGM, and“ zone BGM (H) ”(sound number: BGM-H) has high reliability (expected degree) for the jackpot in the pre-determination for the reserved memory related to the start winning prize (H) BGM consisting of “Song H”.

The “zone production” based on the zone production scenario is started during the fluctuation production of the number of fluctuations one less than the previous fluctuation number corresponding to the storage unit in which the start winning designation command is stored (during “design fluctuation”), It is an effect that is continuously executed before the change (before the reach in the case of the change that performs the reach effect).
In the zone effect executed based on the zone effect scenario, after the “rush sound” (sound number: TAL) with “rush!”, It is associated with each change before the change based on the zone effect scenario. The zone BGM is output and a background image corresponding to the zone BGM is displayed instead of the normal background ("mountain", "beach" or "town").

  In this zone effect, the “L zone” is a zone with low reliability (expectation) for the jackpot memory regarding the start winning prize, and the image display device 14 uses the normal background with low reliability. This is a zone that changes to “background L” of “white” and outputs “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) with low reliability. Further, the “M zone” is a zone with a medium reliability level of reliability (expectation level) for the jackpot of the reserved memory related to the start winning prize, and a normal background is changed to a “background M” of “blue” with a medium reliability level. It is a zone that changes and outputs “zone BGM (M)” (sound number: BGM-M) of medium reliability. In addition, the “H zone” is a zone with high reliability (expectation) for the jackpot of the reserved memory related to the start winning prize, and the normal background is changed to “background H” of “red” with high reliability. It is a zone that changes and outputs a highly reliable “zone BGM (H)” (sound number: BGM-H).

  That is, while the low-reliability zone BGM (L) is being output, the low-reliability “white” “background L” is displayed as the “L zone”, and the medium-reliability zone BGM (M ) Is output in “M zone” in which “background M” of medium reliability “blue” is displayed, and high reliability is output while high reliability zone BGM (H) is output. “H zone” in which “background H” of “red” is displayed.

  In addition, when the zone production based on the zone scenario is started, instead of the “symbol fluctuation BGM” being output, “rush sound” with “rushing in” to notify that “zone production” has entered is output for 3 seconds. Is done. Further, while the “rush sound” is being output, the image display device 14 displays a large text “rush!” (“Zone entry effect”).

  With such a “zone entry effect”, the player is noticed that the “zone effect” starts, and from the type and background image of “zone BGM”, the jackpot determination result for the pending storage related to the zone effect scenario being executed However, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not it will be a big hit.

  Each zone effect scenario shown in the zone effect scenario table shown in FIG. 36 (a) is set such that the reliability with respect to the jackpot is different based on the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 36 (b) to (e).

  In “zone production scenario 1” to “zone production scenario 3”, the reliability to the jackpot of the reserved memory related to the start prize as it becomes “zone production scenario 1”, “zone production scenario 2”, and “zone production scenario 3” (Expectation) becomes high.

  In “zone production scenario 4” to “zone production scenario 8”, “zone production scenario 4”, “zone production scenario 5”, “zone production scenario 6”, “zone production scenario 7”, “zone production scenario 8”. ", The reliability (expected degree) for the jackpot of the reserved memory related to the start winning is increased. The zone effect of “zone effect scenario 5” outputs “zone BGM (L)” with low reliability and displays “background L” of “white” with low reliability before one change of the change. “L zone”, but in this change, “zone BGM (M)” with medium reliability is output and “M zone” is displayed with “blue” “background M” with medium reliability. . Further, the zone effect of “zone effect scenario 6” outputs “zone BGM (M)” of medium reliability and “blue” “medium reliability” for each of the changes before and after the change. The “M zone” for displaying “background M” is a zone effect having higher reliability than the zone effect of “zone effect scenario 5”.

  In “zone production scenario 9” to “zone production scenario 14”, “zone production scenario 9”, “zone production scenario 10”, “zone production scenario 11”, “zone production scenario 12”, “zone production scenario 13”. ”And“ Zone production scenario 14 ”, the reliability (expected degree) for the jackpot of the reserved memory related to the start winning is increased.

  In “zone production scenario 15” to “zone production scenario 20”, “zone production scenario 15”, “zone production scenario 16”, “zone production scenario 17”, “zone production scenario 18”, “zone production scenario 19”. As the “zone effect scenario 20” is reached, the reliability (expectation) for the jackpot of the reserved memory related to the start winning is increased.

  In this way, when the special figure reservation number is 1, the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 1) shown in FIG. 1 ”to“ zone effect scenario 3 ”is determined, and when the number of special figure hold is 2, refer to the zone effect scenario determination table (number of special figure hold = 2) shown in FIG. If any of “zone effect scenario 4” to “zone effect scenario 8” is determined as the zone effect to be executed and the number of special figure reservations is 3, the zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. With reference to special figure hold count = 3), any one of “zone production scenario 9” to “zone production scenario 14” is determined as a zone production to be executed. e) Zone production scenario decision shown in It refers to the table (Japanese view pending number = 4), but is not limited to the example of determining one of "zones directing Scenario 15" - "zone effect Scenario 20" as the zone effect to be executed.

For example, when the special figure reservation number is 1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 1) shown in FIG. 1 "to" zone effect scenario 3 "is determined. When the number of special figure hold is 2, the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 1) shown in FIG. With reference to the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 2) shown in 36 (c), any one of “zone effect scenario 1” to “zone effect scenario 8” is determined as the zone effect to be executed. Also good.
In addition, when the special figure hold number is 3, the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 1) shown in FIG. 36 (b) and the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold) shown in FIG. 36 (c). Number = 2), referring to the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 3) shown in FIG. 36D, and any one of “zone effect scenario 1” to “zone effect scenario 14” is executed as the zone effect to be executed. May be determined.
Further, when the number of special figure hold is 4, the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 1) shown in FIG. 36 (b) and the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number) shown in FIG. 36 (c). = 2), referring to the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 3) shown in FIG. 36 (d) and the zone effect scenario determination table (special figure hold number = 4) shown in FIG. 36 (e). As the zone effect to be performed, any one of “zone effect scenario 1” to “zone effect scenario 20” may be determined.

  In step S1305-4, the sub CPU 102a stores the zone effect data indicating the effect contents of the zone effect scenario determined in step S1305-3, corresponding storage units in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the effect information storage area. Is stored in the production data storage unit.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines “zone effect scenario 4” in step S1305-3, in step S1305-4, the sub CPU 102a stores the first storage unit corresponding to the change in the effect information storage area before the first change. The zone effect data indicating that the “rush sound” and “zone BGM (L)” are output and the image of “background L” is displayed is stored, and the 0th storage unit corresponding to the change in the effect information storage area “Zone BGM (L)” is output, and zone effect data for displaying an image of “background L” is stored.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 68, when starting the output of the “rush sound”, a FO (fade out) process described later is performed over a predetermined FO execution time (for example, 0.5 seconds). While the output volume of the “symbol fluctuation BGM” during output is gradually reduced, the output volume of the “rush sound” is increased over a predetermined FI execution time (for example, 0.5 seconds) by the FI (fade-in) process described later. Gradually rise. The output of “symbol fluctuation BGM” is stopped after the output volume is reduced. On the other hand, the “rush sound” is output at the output volume after the increase in the output volume.

  When the output of “zone BGM” is started, the output volume of the “rush sound” being output gradually decreases over a predetermined FO execution time (for example, 0.5 seconds) by the FO processing. At the same time, the output volume of the “zone BGM” gradually increases over a predetermined FI execution time (for example, 0.5 seconds) by the FI (fade) process. The output of the “rush sound” is stopped after the output volume is reduced. On the other hand, “zone BGM” continues to be output at the increased output volume after the output volume has increased. Then, before reaching the fluctuation (at the end of “symbol fluctuation”), the output volume of the “zone BGM” is gradually increased over a predetermined FO execution time (for example, 0.5 seconds) by the FO processing. The output drops and stops.

  By such FO processing and FI processing, “design fluctuation BGM” is gradually switched to “rush sound”, and thereafter “rush sound” is gradually switched to “zone BGM”. High sound output can be achieved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a determines the determination ratio set in the hold effect determination table (FIG. 37 (b)) stored in the sub ROM 102b based on the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1. %)), Among the holding effects (holding effect scenarios) shown in FIG. 37 (a), a holding effect (holding effect scenario) to be executed is determined by lottery.

In this step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a refers to the hold effect scenario table (FIG. 37 (a)) stored in the sub ROM 102b, and stores the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1. Based on the special figure holding number (U1 or U2) corresponding to the unit (any one of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit), the holding effect scenario of the holding effect to be executed is determined.
For example, when the start winning designation command confirmed in step S1305-1 is “E1H0AH” and the special figure hold number (U1 or U2) is 2, the sub CPU 102a selects “hold effect scenario 2-1”. It is determined at a rate of 15%, “holding effect scenario 2-2” is determined at a rate of 35%, and “holding effect scenario 2-3” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  The “holding effect” is stored in the holding memory in the image display device 14 from the time when the holding memory is stored based on the start winning to the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 to the variation of the holding memory. The corresponding hold image is displayed.

  The “holding effect scenario” is for designating the color of the holding image in each change from the previous change to the change to the change based on the start winning prize. In the hold effect scenario table shown in FIG. 37 (b), the hold effect scenario 1-1 in which the color of the hold image is “white” from start to finish for the start winning designation command related to the hold memory that does not execute the reach effect due to the change. 2-1, 3-1, or 4-1.

  In addition, for the start winning designation command related to the hold storage executed up to “normal reach” by the change, the hold effect scenario 1-1, 2-1, 3-1 in which the color of the hold image is “white” from the beginning, or 4-1 or the hold production scenario 1-2, 2-2, 3-2, or 4-2 in which the color of the hold image is “blue” from start to finish is determined.

  In addition, with respect to the start winning designation command related to the hold storage executed up to “super reach” by the change, the hold effect scenarios 1-1, 2-1, 3-1, in which the color of the hold image is “white” throughout. Or, 4-1 or the hold effect scenario 1-2, 2-2, 3-2, or 4-2 where the color of the hold image is “blue” throughout, or the color of the hold image is “green” throughout. A certain hold production scenario 1-3, 2-3, 3-3, or 4-3 is determined.

  In addition, with respect to the start winning designation command related to the hold memory that is executed up to “special reach” by the change, the hold effect scenarios 1-1, 2-1, 3-1 in which the color of the hold image is “white” from the beginning, Or, 4-1 or the hold effect scenario 1-2, 2-2, 3-2, or 4-2 where the color of the hold image is “blue” throughout, or the color of the hold image is “green” throughout. A hold effect scenario 1-3, 2-3, 3-3, or 4-3, or a hold effect scenario 1-4, 2-4, 3 in which the color of the hold image changes from “green” to “red” -4, or 4-4, or the hold effect scenario 1-5, 2-5, 3-5, or 4-5 in which the color of the hold image is "red" throughout.

  In the hold effect scenario table shown in FIG. 37 (b), when the pre-determined result of the hold memory related to the start winning is “big hit”, the hold image is displayed at a higher rate than the case of “losing”. The determination ratio (%) is set so that the color finally becomes “red”.

  Thus, based on the determination ratio of the hold effect scenario in the hold effect determination table shown in FIG. 37B, “hold effect scenarios 1-1, 2-1, 3-1, 4-1”, “hold effect” "Scenario 1-2, 2-2, 3-2, 4-2", "Holding production scenario 1-3, 2-3, 3-3, 4-3", "Holding production scenario 1-4, 2-4" 3-4, 4-4 "and" holding production scenario 1-5, 2-5, 3-5, 4-5 ", the reliability (expected degree) for the jackpot in the prior determination increases. The hold effect that is displayed in red from the start winning prize may make the player have a higher sense of expectation for the jackpot than the hold effect that changes the hold image from “green” to “red” it can.

  In addition, when there is a holding storage related to the holding effect scenario in which the color of the holding image changes, a holding effect scenario in which the color of the holding image does not change is determined for the holding memory stored after that. May be. Alternatively, only when the pre-determination result related to the hold storage is a big hit, the hold effect scenario in which the color of the hold image changes may be determined regardless of this.

  Further, in the hold effect, as will be described later, a start winning sound is output as the hold image is displayed on the image display device 14 at the time of starting winning. If the color of the reserved image at the time of winning the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 is “white” or “blue”, “start winning sound 1” (sound number: SN1) is set to “green” or “ If it is “red”, “start winning sound 2” (sound number: SN2) is output from the sound output device 15. Thus, when displaying the hold image at the time of starting winning, the start winning sound corresponding to the color of the holding image is output, so that the player's interest in the holding image can be increased.

  In step S1305-6, the sub CPU 102a sets a hold effect control command for controlling the hold effect of the hold effect scenario determined in step S1305-5 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1305-7, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect data indicating the content of the hold effect determined in step S1305-5 in the storage unit of any one of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the effect information storage area. The data is stored in the data storage unit, and the start winning control process is terminated.

  As will be described later, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the special CPU variation pattern designation command and the fluctuation associated with the effect mode set in the current gaming state. From the effect pattern determination table, a process for determining a variable effect pattern is performed.

Here, the variation effect pattern table will be described.
FIG. 38 shows a variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode AX that can be selected by the player, which is stored in the sub ROM 102b and is set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state described later. Yes.
FIG. 39 shows a variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode AY that can be selected by the player, which is stored in the sub ROM 102b and is set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state described later. Show.
FIG. 40 shows a variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode AZ that can be selected by the player and is set in the low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state described later, which is stored in the sub ROM 102b. Show.
Note that the description of the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B and the effect mode C will be omitted.

  The variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 include special symbol determination results (decision results for jackpot determination), special diagram variation pattern designation commands from the main control board 101, and variations corresponding to the special diagram variation time. Based on the production time (s) of the production, the fluctuation production pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the fluctuation production pattern, the fluctuation production pattern determined according to the fluctuation production pattern judgment value, and the fluctuation production pattern The contents of the fluctuation effects and the presence / absence of execution (execution (◯), non-execution (×)) of each additional effect in the fluctuation effects based on the fluctuation effect pattern are stored in association with each other.

The variation effect pattern determination tables associated with the effect modes AX to AZ of FIGS. 38 to 40 are provided with a first jackpot to give the player a sense of expectation such as whether to win the first jackpot or the second jackpot. Or, as a variation production pattern with different expectations for winning the second jackpot, a variation production pattern that executes super reach after execution of normal reach, a variation production pattern that executes special reach after execution of normal reach, and super reach after execution of normal reach , And after that, it has a fluctuating effect to execute special reach.
In addition, in order to give the player a sense of expectation whether or not to win the third big hit or the small win, a variation production pattern in which a story reach is executed after execution of a normal reach, and a variation production pattern in which a challenge reach is executed after execution of a normal reach And have.

  In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is determined, the variation effect in the effect modes AX to AX that may be selected by the player based on the variation effect pattern determination value A pattern is determined. As described above, the difference between the production modes AX to AZ that can be changed by the player's operation is the background, the type of additional production, and the type of BGM, and the others are the same.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the variation effect patterns AX001 to AX044, the variation effect patterns AY001 to AY044, and the variation effect patterns AZ001 to AZ044 are associated with each other. That is, the variation effect patterns AX001, AY001, and AZ001 can be changed by the player's operation, and the variation effect patterns AX002, AY002, and AZ002 can be changed. , AZ044's variation effect can be changed. Thus, in the variation effect patterns of the effect modes AX to AZ, the variation effect patterns having the same numbers in the names can be changed from each other.

Here, a case where the notice effect is executed during the “effect mode selectable period” in which the effect modes AX to AZ can be selected by the player's operation will be described.
It should be noted that the “effect mode selectable period” is a period between the standby state before the start of the variable effect and after all the special effect symbols start to change in the variable effect (for example, 0.7% from the start of the variable effect). Set after one second has elapsed (at this point all special effects symbols are changing at high speed) until the timing at which one of the special effects symbols (first symbol) switches from high-speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation. Is done.
For example, the period from the start of the change effect to the elapse of 0.7 seconds is a “effect mode non-selectable period” in which the effect modes AX to AZ cannot be selected by the player's operation. In addition, the period from when one of the special effect symbols (the first symbol) is switched from the high speed fluctuation to the deceleration fluctuation until the fluctuation stop is an “effect mode non-selectable period”. Therefore, during the reach production, the production modes AX to AZ cannot be selected.

  In this way, by providing the “effect mode non-selectable period” at the start of the variation effect, the player can recognize the start of the variation effect.

  In the example described here, a notice effect executed in a predetermined effect mode (eg, “effect mode AY”) and a notice effect executed in another changed effect mode (eg, “effect mode AZ”) The execution time of is assumed to be set to be the same.

  Based on the player's operation when a notice effect (eg, “character notice AY1”) in a predetermined effect mode (eg, “effect mode AY”) has not yet started during the “effect mode selectable period”. The production mode is changed to another production mode (for example, “production mode AZ” is changed). In this case, in the effect mode after the change, the notice effect in the effect mode (for example, “character notice AZ1”) is started at a predetermined start timing.

  Further, during the “effect mode selectable period”, when a notice effect (eg, “character notice AY1”) of a predetermined effect mode (eg, “effect mode AY”) is being executed, based on the player's operation. Suppose that the effect mode is changed to another effect mode (for example, “effect mode AZ”). In this case, the execution of the notice effect (for example, “character notice AY1”) in the effect mode before the change is stopped from the time when the effect mode is changed.

  Alternatively, when the notice effect (for example, “character notice AY1”) is being executed, the effect mode selection operation may be disabled. Thus, the notice effect is executed from the beginning to the end in the effect mode being set.

  Alternatively, during a “effect mode selectable period”, when a notice effect (eg, “character notice AY1”) of a predetermined effect mode (eg, “effect mode AY”) is being executed, based on the player's operation. When the effect mode is changed to another effect mode (for example, “effect mode AZ”), the notice effect (for example, “character notice AY1”) of the effect mode before the change is executed from the time when the effect mode is changed. As a notice effect in the effect mode after the change, a notice effect (for example, “Character notice AZ1”) executed at the same time as the notice effect before the change is started from the timing when the effect mode is changed. Good.

  Note that a predetermined start timing may be set in advance for the notice effect, and in that case, the notice effect in the effect mode after the change may be started from the set start timing. For example, in the production mode before the change and the production mode after the change, when the three-step step-up notice is set, the production mode is in the middle of the first stage of the step-up notice in the production mode before the change. In the production mode after the change, the step-up notice is started from the start timing of the second stage, and the production mode is changed after the completion of the first stage of the step-up notice in the production mode before the change. In such a case, in the changed effect mode, the second stage effect of the step-up notice may not be performed, but may be started from the start timing of the third stage.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, when “E6H00H” or “E7H00H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, the variation pattern determination value is any one of 0 to 49. "Change effect pattern AX001" is determined as the change effect pattern in effect mode AX, "Change effect pattern AY001" is determined as the change effect pattern in effect mode AY, and "Change effect pattern AZ001" is determined as the change effect pattern in effect mode AZ. Is done.
In this case, for example, when the effect mode is set to the effect mode AY by the player's operation when the effect mode AX is set and the effect effect of “variable effect pattern AX001” is being executed, “the effect effect pattern AY001” Fluctuation effect from the time point when the effect mode AY is set is executed. After that, when the production mode is changed from the production mode AY to the production mode AZ by the player's operation, the variation production from the time when the production mode AZ of the “variation production pattern AZ001” is set is executed.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode AX in FIG. 38, when “E6H00H” or “E7H00H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. The “variation effect pattern AX001” and “variation effect pattern AX002” that can be determined as the variation effect pattern of the effect mode AX will be described.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern AX001” and “variation effect pattern AX002” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 4 seconds (“symbol variation AX2-1”, “symbol variation AX2-”). 1 ”), which is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  Further, when the special symbol determination result is a loss, when “E6H01H” or “E7H01H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variable rendering pattern AX003” that can be determined as the variation rendering pattern of the rendering mode AX. The “variation effect pattern AX004” will be described.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern AX003” and “variation effect pattern AX004” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 8 seconds (“symbol variation AX3-1”, “symbol variation AX3-2”). "), A fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  Further, when the special symbol determination result is a loss, when “E6H02H” or “E7H02H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variable rendering pattern AX005” that can be determined as the variation rendering pattern of the rendering mode AX. The “variation effect pattern AX006” will be described.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern AX005” and “variation effect pattern AX006” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 12 seconds (“symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AX1-2”). ), A fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When the special symbol determination result is lost, and “E6H03H” or “E7H03H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variable rendering pattern AX007”, “ The “variation effect pattern AX008” will be described.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern AX007” and “variation effect pattern AX008” displays a plurality of special effect symbols variably (“symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AX1-2”). Normal reach ("Normal reach AX1-1", "Normal reach AX1-2") that temporarily stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost It is a fluctuating production.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, when “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variable rendering pattern AX021” that can be determined as the variation rendering pattern of the rendering mode AX The “variation effect pattern AX022” will be described.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern AX021” and “variation effect pattern AX022” displays a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AX1-2”). Normal reach (“Normal reach AX1-1”, “Normal reach AX1-2”) is performed, with the symbols (left and right symbols) temporarily stopped at the same numerical value and the main character goes on a battle journey. Then, the super-reach (“super reach AX1-1”, “super reach AX1-2”), which has a higher expectation for jackpot than the normal reach, is performed to notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the first jackpot Production.

  When “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, the variation variation pattern AX023 and the variation variation pattern AX024 are selected. Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern AX023” and “variation effect pattern AX024” are a variable display of a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AX1-2”), and the above-mentioned special effect symbols. The normal reach (“Normal reach AX1-1” and “Normal reach AX1-2”) is displayed to temporarily stop and display the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same value, and then the expectation for jackpots is higher than normal reach and super reach. Special reach (“Special Reach AX1-1”, “Special Reach AX1-2”), where the hero character defeats an enemy character different from the enemy character appearing in “Super Reach”. ”), And is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the first jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, when “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variable rendering pattern AX025” that can be determined as the variation rendering pattern of the rendering mode AX The “variation effect pattern AX026” will be described.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern AX025” and “variation effect pattern AX026” displays a plurality of special effect symbols variably (“symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AX1-2”). Normal reach ("Normal reach AX1-1", "Normal reach AX1-2") that displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value as a temporary stop, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach, and the hero After the super-reach (“Super-reach AX1-1”, “Super-reach AX1-2”), which is directed to defeat enemy characters, the hero has higher expectations for jackpots than the super-reach, and the hero The character of the enemy kills an enemy character that is different from the enemy character that appears in "Super Reach". Cormorant effect contents of Special Reach ( "Special reach AX1-1", "Special reach AX1-2") is performed, the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a fluctuation performance to inform the fact, which is the first big hit.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, when “E6H10H” or “E7H10H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation rendering pattern AX033” that can be determined as the variation rendering pattern of the rendering mode AX The “variation effect pattern AX034” will be described.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern AX033” and “variation effect pattern AX034” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AX1-2”). Normal reach ("Normal reach AX1-1", "Normal reach AX1-2") that temporarily displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then appears in challenge reach as described above. Going on a journey to find a dog where the character has disappeared, and finally finding a pet dog, a story reach consisting of a story that suggests that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot ("Story reach AX1- 1 ”,“ Story Reach AX1-2 ”) and report that the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot Is the variation directed to.

When the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, when “E6H11H” or “E7H11H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variable rendering pattern AX035” that can be determined as the variation rendering pattern of the rendering mode AX The “variation effect pattern AX036” will be described.
As described above, the variation effect of “variation effect pattern AX035” and “variation effect pattern AX036” is the purpose of the character from a plurality of treasure chests after the symbol variation including two pseudo-reams (“pseudo-ream 2”). Challenge treasure hunting game of searching for the sword of the item, and the fact that the character wins the item suggests that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot ("challenge reach AX1-" 1 ”,“ Challenge Reach AX1-2 ”), and is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, when “E6H12H” or “E7H12H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation rendering pattern AX037” that can be determined as the variation rendering pattern of the rendering mode AX The “variation effect pattern AX038” will be described.

  The variation production of “variation production pattern AX037” to “variation production pattern AX038” is a cloak of a target item from a plurality of treasure chests after a character variation including three pseudo-reams (“pseudo-run 3”). A challenge reach (“challenge reach AX2-1”, “challenge reach AX2-”) that challenges the treasure hunt game and suggests that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a small hit depending on the item acquired by the character. 2 ”), and is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode AX, “variation effect pattern AX001” to “variation effect pattern AX044” include “development notice AX”, “line notice AX”, and “decision effect AX” as additional effects. Execution (◯) or non-execution (×) information is associated.

Although the details will be described later in “Development Notice AX”, the following effects are performed as a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the determination result of jackpot is a jackpot. In this “development advance notice AX”, an operation promotion notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation is performed during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A, and if the remaining operation effective period is 1 second or more, the first effect button Each time 18A is pressed down, the gauge meter value displayed on the image display device 14 decreases by the number of reductions determined by lottery, and with this, “operation sound 2-1” (picone) is output. Is done. When the current “normal reach” develops to “super reach” with a higher expectation for jackpot, the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period when the operation effective period becomes less than 1 second remains. As a result of the above operation, an image with a meter value of 0 is displayed and “operation sound 2-2” (Kern) is output instead of “operation sound 2-1” (picone) as the operation sound. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “success effect” consisting of a character image (“success !!!!” (font X)) and a voice (HAX1: “success” (voice X)) is executed.
On the other hand, when the current “normal reach” does not evolve to “super reach”, the meter value is also obtained by operating the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period when the operation effective period is less than 1 second. Does not become 0, and “operation sound 2-1” is output. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “failure effect” composed of a character image (“failure!” (Font X)) and a sound (HAX1: “failure” (voice X)) is executed.
In the effect mode AX, as will be described later, any one of “development notice AX1” accompanied by “successful effect” and “development notice AX2” accompanied by “failure effect” is executed.

  “Serif notice AX” is an image (character image and serif character display) that indicates that the character unique to the production mode AX refers to any of a plurality of serifs with different expectations for jackpots. A notice effect that displays on the display device 14 and outputs the speech of the speech from the sound output device 15 to notify the possibility of executing the jackpot game and give a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot It is. In the effect mode AX, as will be described later, any one of “Serif Notice AX1” to “Serial Notice AX3” is executed as “Serif Notice AX”.

  The “decision effect AX” is an effect for informing the determination of a big hit as will be described later. “Decisive effect AX” is an operation promotion notification during the operation effective period, and the first big button or the second big win is won by pressing the first effect button 18A or when the operation effective period elapses. If it is, the “decorative effect” for moving the first decorative member 17A is executed, and if lost, the “lost effect” that does not operate the first decorative member 17A is executed. In the effect mode AX, “decided effect AX1” or “determined effect AX2” is executed as described later.

As shown in FIG. 38, for example, when the special symbol determination result is “fluctuation effect pattern AX021”, “development notice AX” is executed (O), “serial notice AX” is executed (O), “decision effect AX”. Is associated with non-execution (x).
When the sub CPU 102a determines the “variation effect pattern AX021”, the sub CPU 102a confirms that “development notice AX” and “line notice AX” are executed as additional effects.

  As described above, the “effect mode AY” can execute four types of additional effects (“character notice AY”, “development notice AY”, “line notice AY”, and “decision effect AY”). In addition to the melody sound that is played with the same instrument as the instrument that plays the melody sound in AX, this is an effect mode that executes a fluctuating effect that outputs BGM having a rhythm sound from the drum. The other effect contents are effect mode AX, An effect similar to the AZ variation effect is performed.

  Further, as described above, the “effect mode AZ” includes five types of additional effects (“character notice AZ (1)”, “character notice AZ (2)”, “development notice AZ”, “serif notice AZ”, “Decision effect AZ”) can be executed, and this is an effect mode that outputs a BGM consisting only of melody sounds played with a different instrument from the instrument that plays the melody sound in effect mode AX. An effect similar to the change effect of the modes AX and AY is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode AY, “variable effect pattern AY001” to “variable effect pattern AY044” include “character notice AY”, “development notice AY”, “ Information indicating execution (O) or non-execution (X) is associated with each of “Serial notice AY” and “Decision effect AY”.

  “Character notice AY”, as will be described later, displays on the image display device 14 images of any of a plurality of characters unique to the rendering mode AY, which have different expectations for jackpots, and is unique to “Character notice AY”. This is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot by informing the possibility of executing the jackpot game by outputting a performance sound consisting of a melody sound from the sound output device 15. In the effect mode AY, as will be described later, any one of “character notice AY1” to “character notice AY5” is executed as “character notice AY”.

In “Development notice AY”, as in “Development notice AX”, an operation promotion notification is made to prompt continuous operation during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A, and the operation effective period is 1 second or more remaining. Then, each time the first effect button 18A is pressed once, the gauge meter value displayed on the image display device 14 is reduced by the number determined by the lottery, along with “operation sound 2”. -1 "(picone) is output. When the current “normal reach” develops to “super reach” with a higher expectation for jackpot, the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period when the operation effective period becomes less than 1 second remains. As a result of the above operation, an image with a meter value of 0 is displayed and “operation sound 2-2” (Kern) is output instead of “operation sound 2-1” (picone) as the operation sound. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “success effect” composed of a character image (“success !!” (font Y)) and a sound (HAY1: “success” (voice Y)) is executed.
On the other hand, when the current “normal reach” does not evolve to “super reach”, the meter value is also obtained by operating the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period when the operation effective period is less than 1 second. Does not become 0, and “operation sound 2-1” is output. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “failure effect” consisting of a character image (“failure!” (Font Y)) and a sound (HAY1: “failure” (voice Y)) is executed.
In the effect mode AY, as will be described later, one of “development notice AY1” with “success effect” and “development notice AY2” with “failure effect” is executed.

  “Serif notice AY” is similar to “Serial notice AX”, and is an image (character image, which indicates that the character unique to the production mode AY is one of a plurality of lines having different expectations for jackpots. In addition, by displaying the speech of the lines on the image display device 14 and outputting the sound of the lines from the sound output device 15, the possibility of executing the jackpot game is notified, and the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot It is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation of something. In the effect mode AY, as will be described later, any one of “serif notice AY1” to “serif notice AY3” is executed as “serif notice AY”.

  The “decision effect AY” is an effect that informs of the determination of the big hit, as with the “decision effect AX”. “Decision effect AY” is an operation promotion notification during the operation effective period, and the first effect button 18A is pressed or the operation effective period elapses to win the first jackpot or the second jackpot. If it is, the “decorative effect” for moving the first decorative member 17A is executed, and if lost, the “lost effect” that does not operate the first decorative member 17A is executed. In the effect mode AY, as described later, “decided effect AY1” or “decided effect AY2” is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode AZ, “variable effect pattern AZ001” to “variable effect pattern AZ044” include “character notice AZ (1)”, “character” as additional effects. Information indicating execution (◯) or non-execution (×) is associated with each of the “notice AZ (2)”, “development notice AZ”, “line notice AZ”, and “decision effect AZ”.

  As will be described later, “Character Notice AZ (1)” displays on the image display device 14 images of any of a plurality of characters unique to the rendering mode AZ that have different expectations for jackpots, and “Character Notice AZ” A notice that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot by notifying the possibility of executing the jackpot game by outputting a production sound consisting of a melody sound unique to “(1)” from the sound output device 15 Production. In the effect mode AZ, as will be described later, any one of “character notice AZ (1) 1” to “character notice AZ (1) 5” is executed as “character notice AZ (1)”.

  “Character notice AZ (2)”, as will be described later, is unique to the production mode AZ, which has different expectations for jackpots, and is a plurality of characters different from those appearing in “Character notice AZ (1)”. While displaying any image on the image display device 14 and outputting a production sound composed of a melody sound unique to the “character notice AZ (2)” from the sound output device 15, the possibility of executing the jackpot game This is a notice effect that gives notification and gives an expectation that the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot. In the effect mode AZ, as will be described later, any one of “character notice AZ (2) 1” to “character notice AZ (2) 5” is executed as “character notice AZ (2)”.

  In “Development Notice AZ”, as in “Development Notice AX” and “Development Notice AY”, an operation promotion notification that prompts repeated operation during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A is performed, and the operation is effective. If the remaining period is 1 second or more, each time the first effect button 18A is pressed once, the gauge meter value displayed on the image display device 14 decreases by the decrease determined by the lottery, At the same time, “operation sound 2-1” (picone) is output. When the current “normal reach” develops to “super reach” with a higher expectation for jackpot, the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period when the operation effective period becomes less than 1 second remains. As a result of the above operation, an image with a meter value of 0 is displayed and “operation sound 2-2” (Kern) is output instead of “operation sound 2-1” (picone) as the operation sound. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “success effect” composed of a character image (“success !!” (font Z)) and a sound (HAZ1: “success” (voice Z)) is executed.

On the other hand, when the current “normal reach” does not evolve to “super reach”, the meter value is also obtained by operating the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period when the operation effective period is less than 1 second. Does not become 0, and “operation sound 2-1” is output. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “failure effect” composed of a character image (“failure!” (Font Z)) and a sound (HAZ1: “failure” (voice Z)) is executed.
In the production mode AZ, as will be described later, one of “development notice AZ1” accompanied by “successful production” and “development notice AZ2” accompanied by “failure production” is executed.

  “Selif Notice AZ”, like “Selif Notice AX” and “Selif Notice AY”, indicates that the character unique to the production mode AZ is one of a plurality of words having different expectations for the jackpot Are displayed on the image display device 14 and the sound of the speech is output from the sound output device 15 to notify the possibility of executing the jackpot game. This is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the determination result is a big hit. In the effect mode AZ, as will be described later, any of “Serif Notice AZ1” to “Serif Notice AZ3” is executed as “Selif Notice AZ”.

The “decision effect AZ” is an effect for notifying the determination of a big hit, as in the “decision effect AX” and “decision effect AY”. “Decisive effect AZ” is an operation promotion notification during the operation effective period, and is won by pressing the first effect button 18A, or when the operation effective period elapses, and wins the first jackpot or the second jackpot. If it is, the “decorative effect” for moving the first decorative member 17A is executed, and if lost, the “lost effect” that does not operate the first decorative member 17A is executed. In the effect mode AZ, “decided effect AZ1” or “determined effect AZ2” is executed as described later.
In the “decision effect AX”, “decision effect AY”, and “decision effect AZ”, in addition to the first decorative member 17A, one or both of the second decorative member 17B and the third decorative member 17C are also described above. A moving operation may be performed.

Detailed description of the fluctuating effects in effect mode B and effect mode C is omitted. Fluctuation production performed in production mode B set in high probability game state and short time game state that is easier to win a big hit than low probability game state and non-time short game state, as a simple production that does not hit too much in the notice production Yes.
The variation effect executed in the effect mode C has the same effect content as the effect mode A.

  In the production mode B, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special drawing is more effective than the production modes AX to AZ so that the fluctuation production of the next special figure fluctuation frequency is immediately executed at a high rate. The variation time is 2 seconds, and the variation effect pattern of the variation effect has a high ratio. In addition, when the special effect design is changed to reach, only the “special character reach” is executed so that characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other.

(Type of additional production)
41 and 42 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 38, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an additional effect type determination table for determining the type of additional effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode AX”. FIG. 41A is a diagram showing an additional effect type determination table for determining the type of each additional effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode AX when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 41B shows each addition for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode AX when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the additional production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the execution ratio (%) of “Development notice AX1” and “Development notice AX2” as “Development notice AX” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “Serif notice AX1” to “Serif notice AX3” is set, and the execution ratio (%) of “Decision effect AX1” and “Decision effect AX2” as “Decision effect AX” is set. .

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an additional effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of additional effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode AX. FIG. 42A shows a “development notice AX information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice AX” in the production mode AX. FIG. 42B is a diagram showing a “line notice AX information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “line notice AX” in the effect mode AX. FIG. 42C is a diagram showing a “determined effect AX information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect AX” in the effect mode AX.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern of the effect mode AX based on the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 38, which of the types of additional effects set in the table of FIG. 42 is executed is shown in FIG. Based on the execution ratio shown in the table of (b), it is determined by lottery.

  Note that “decision effect AX” is not limited to an example in which the presence / absence of execution and the type of execution are determined by lottery by lottery, and the presence / absence of execution based on the variation effect pattern of the effect mode AX in advance. When executing, the type may be determined.

  For example, in the case of a fluctuating effect that executes “decision effect AX”, a fluctuating effect pattern that is determined when the jackpot determination result is “hit”, and a change that is determined when the jackpot determination result is “losing” In any of the effect patterns, an effect of the content that the main character (swordsman) fights with an enemy character unique to the AX mode is executed in “special reach”, and “decision effect AX” is performed during the effect.

  In this case, if the “decision effect AX” is “big hit”, after the first decorative member 17A moves, the effect that the main character defeats the enemy character is given, and the big hit is notified. On the other hand, in the “decision effect AX”, if it is “losing”, the first decorative member 17A does not move, but the hero character is brought down by the enemy character, and a “special effect” is notified. Reach production of “Reach”.

  Further, for example, in the case of a variable effect that does not execute the “decision effect AX”, in the variable effect pattern in the case where the determination result of the jackpot is “hit”, the character (swordsman) of the main character is another character in the “special reach”. In the variation production pattern in which the effect that the end of the happy ending is met with the (princess unique to AX mode) and the jackpot judgment result is “losing”, the character of the main character (swordsman) in “Special Reach” ) Does not meet the princess character unique to the AX mode, and the image display device 14 produces an effect that the screen is darkened and ends in a bad end.

  “Development notice AX1” is a reach (“super reach” or “special reach”) that has a higher expectation for jackpot than “normal reach” in the latter half of the “normal reach” of the variable production executed in “direction mode AX”. The effect of development is notified by a “success effect” described later. In the “development notice AX1”, an operation promotion notification for prompting a continuous hit operation is performed during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A, and if the operation effective period is 1 second or more, the first effect button Each time 18A is pressed once, the meter value of the gauge displayed on the image display device 14 decreases by the number of reductions determined by lottery, and with this, “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2 -1 (picone)) is output.

  When the operation effective period is less than 1 second, an image with a meter value of 0 is displayed by the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and “operation sound 2-1” is displayed as the operation sound. Instead of (sound number: S2-1 (picone)), “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2 (Kahn)) is output. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “success effect” consisting of a character image (“success !!!!” (font X)) and a voice (HAX1: “success” (voice X)) is executed. After that, it is informed that the current “normal reach” will develop into a “super reach” with a higher expectation for jackpot.

  “Development Advance AX2” is a reach (“Super Reach” or “Special Reach”) that has a higher expectation for jackpot than “Normal Reach” in the latter half of “Normal Reach” of the fluctuating production performed in “Direction Mode AX”. The fact that it does not develop is notified by a “failure effect” described later. In the “development notice AX2”, an operation promotion notification for prompting a continuous hitting operation is performed during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A, and if the operation effective period is 1 second or more, the first effect button Each time 18A is pressed once, the meter value of the gauge displayed on the image display device 14 decreases by the number of reductions determined by lottery, and with this, “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2 -1 (picone)) is output.

  When the operation effective period is less than 1 second, the meter value does not become 0 and “operation sound 2-1” is output even by the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period. . Then, as a corresponding effect, a “failure effect” composed of a character image (“failure!” (Font X)) and a sound (HAX1: “failure” (voice X)) is executed. After that, the special design symbol's middle symbol (3rd symbol) is stopped and displayed with a symbol with a numerical value different from the left symbol (1st symbol) and the right symbol (2nd symbol). Is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the sub ROM 102b stores a meter value decrease number determination table for determining the decrease value of the meter value in the lottery described above. The sub CPU 102a determines the decrease number of the meter value at the determination ratio shown in the meter value decrease number determination table, and decreases the meter value by the determined decrease number. As shown in FIG. 47, in this meter value reduction number determination table, “development notice AX1” is more than “development notice AX2”, and “big hit” is more than the case where the big hit determination result is “losing”. Is set so that a larger value is selected at a higher rate as the number of decrease of the gauge meter value in the operation effective period of 1 second or more.

  45A and 45B, the fluctuation effect patterns AX007 and AX008 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H03H and E7H03H in the tables of FIGS. 45A and 45B develop from “normal reach” to the next reach. Therefore, the “development notice AX2” for performing the “failure effect” is executed, and the operation sound of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period remains “operation sound 2-1.”

  On the other hand, in the variation production of the variation production patterns AX015 and AX016 determined based on the special figure variation pattern designation commands E6H07H and E7H07H, the “successful production” AX1 performs “success production” in order to develop from “normal reach” to the next reach. The operation sound of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period is changed from “operation sound 2-1” to “operation sound 2-2”.

  Further, the fluctuation effect patterns AX019 and AX020 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H09H and E7H09H, the fluctuation presentation patterns AX021 and AX022 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0AH and E7H0AH, and the special figure fluctuation pattern Fluctuation effect patterns AX025 and AX026 determined based on the designation commands E6H0CH and E7H0CH, Fluctuation effect patterns AX027 and AX028 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0DH and E7H0DH, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0FH and E7H0FH “Development notice AX1” is similarly executed for the fluctuation effects of the fluctuation effect patterns AX031 and AX032 determined based on the above.

“Selif notice AX” is executed during “super reach” in the production mode AX.
“Selif notice AX1” is effective when the non-projecting first effect button 18A is pressed during the operation effective period, and “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1) is sounded when the first effect button 18A is pressed. Output from the output device 15. Then, based on the fact that the first effect button 18A is pressed during the operation valid period, the character “Character X”, which is unique to the effect mode AX, says the line “Furious!”. The image of the contents (the image of “Character X” and the image of the line “Flame heat!”) Are displayed on the image display device 14, and “line effect sound corresponding to the line advance notice AX1” (sound number) as the sound of the line : RAX1 ("extreme heat" (voice X))) is output from the sound output device 15.

  In “Serif notice AX2”, the character “Character X”, which is a character unique to the effect mode AX, is “hot !!” based on the pressing of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period. Are displayed on the image display device 14 and the “voice announcement AX2 effect sound” (sound) is displayed as the voice of the speech. No .: RAX2 (“HOT” (Voice X))) is output from the sound output device 15, and the same effect as “Serif notice AX1” is performed.

  In the “line notice AX3”, the character unique to the production mode AX says a line “Chance !!” based on the fact that the first production button 18A is pressed during the operation valid period. The image (the image of “Character X” and the image of the line “Hot !!”) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the “line announcement AX3 effect sound” (sound number: RAX3 (“chance” "(Voice X)))" is output from the sound output device 15, and the same effect as "Serial notice AX1" is performed.

“Decision effect AX” is executed during “special reach” in effect mode AX.
The “decision effect AX1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member when the jackpot determination result is “big hit”, and not to move when it is “lost”. is there. In the “determination effect AX1”, an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the first effect button 18A is executed during the operation effective period, and the first effect button 18A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation effective period. Corresponding to the case where the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or the case of a loss based on the operation being performed or the operation effective period elapses without the first effect button 18A being operated during the operation effective period The corresponding production is executed.

  Note that in the “determination effect AX1”, the state of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period may be a non-projecting state. Alternatively, for example, when the jackpot determination result is “losing”, “projecting state” is selected at a rate of 20%, “non-projecting state” is selected at a rate of 80%, and when “big hit” is set, 80 is selected. The selection ratio may be set so that “protruding state” is selected at a rate of% and “non-projecting state” is selected at a rate of 20%.

As a corresponding effect of the “decision effect AX1” at the time of the big hit, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-2”, and further, an effect image (“effect Xa” is displayed as an image) A corresponding effect such as displaying “determination effect AX (winning) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAXa) from the sound output device 15 is displayed.
As the corresponding effect of the “decision effect AX1” at the time of the loss, the effect image (“effect Xb” is displayed on the image display device 14 without moving the first decorative member 17A, and the “decision effect AX (lost) corresponding effect sound” is displayed. ”(Sound number: KAXb) is output from the sound output device 15.

In the “decision effect AX2”, the operation effective period is not set, and the corresponding effect corresponding to each of the cases where the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or lost is executed at a predetermined timing (additional effect without operation).
As the corresponding effect of the “decision effect AX2” at the time of the big hit, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-2” in the same way as the “decision effect AX1”. A corresponding effect such as displaying an image (“effect Xa” on the image display device 14 and outputting a “decided effect AX (winning) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAXa) from the sound output device 15 is executed.
As a corresponding effect of the “decision effect AX2” at the time of losing, the effect image (“effect Xb” is displayed on the image display device 14 without moving the first decorative member 17A, as in the “decision effect AX1”. A corresponding effect such as “determination effect AX (losing) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAXb) is output from the sound output device 15 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 41A and 41B, the “decided effect AX1” is higher in the “decided effect AX1” than the “decided effect AX2” in the “decided effect AX”. The execution ratio of “effect AX1” and “decision effect AX2” is set. In other words, the “decision effect AX1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  43 and 44 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 39, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an additional effect type determination table for determining the type of each additional effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode AY”. FIG. 43A is a diagram illustrating an additional effect type determination table for determining the type of each additional effect for each variation effect pattern in the effect mode AY when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 43 (b) shows each addition for each variation effect pattern in the effect mode AY when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot”, or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the additional production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, execution ratios (%) of “character notice AY1” to “character notice AY5” as “character notice AY” are set, and “development notice AY” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “Development Notice AY1” and “Development Notice AY2” is set, and the execution ratio (%) of “Serif Notice AY1” to “Serial Notice AY3” as “Selif Notice AY” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect AY1” and “decided effect AY2” as “decided effect AY” is set.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an additional effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of additional effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode AY. FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a “character notice AY information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice AY” in the effect mode AY. FIG. 44B is a diagram showing an “development advance notice AY information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “development advance notice AY” in the effect mode AY. FIG. 44 (c) is a diagram showing a “Serif Notice AY Information Table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “Serif Notice AY” in the effect mode AY. FIG. 44D is a diagram showing a “determined effect AY information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect AY” in the effect mode AY.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern of the effect mode AY based on the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 39, which of the types of additional effects set in the table of FIG. 44 is executed is shown in FIG. Based on the execution ratio shown in the table of (b), it is determined by lottery.

  Note that “decision effect AY” is not limited to an example in which the presence / absence of execution and the type of execution are determined by lottery, as in “decision effect AX”. Based on the performance pattern, the presence or absence of execution and the type of execution may be determined.

In this case, in the case of the fluctuating effect for executing the above-mentioned “decision effect AY”, the fluctuating effect pattern determined when the jackpot determination result is “hit”, and determined when the jackpot determination result is “lost” In any of the variation effect patterns to be performed, an effect of the content that the main character (swordsman) fights with an enemy character unique to the AY mode is executed in “Special Reach”, and “Decision Effect AY” is performed during the effect. I do.
In this case, if the “decision effect AY” is “big hit”, after the first decorative member 17A moves, the effect that the main character defeats the enemy character is given, and the big hit is notified. On the other hand, in the “decision effect AY”, if it is “lost”, the first decorative member 17A does not move, but the hero character is brought down by the enemy character, and a “special effect” is notified. Reach production of “Reach”.

  Further, for example, in the case of a variable effect that does not execute the “decision effect AY”, in the variable effect pattern when the determination result of the jackpot is “hit”, the character (swordsman) of the main character is another character in the “special reach”. In the variation production pattern in which the effect that the end of the happy ending was met with (a princess unique to AY mode) and the jackpot determination result is “losing”, the character (swordsman) of the main character in “Special Reach” ) Does not meet the princess character unique to the AY mode, and the image display device 14 produces an effect that the image is darkened and ends in a bad end.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), “Character notice AY1” to “Character notice AY5” do not set the operation valid period, and display the effect images of “Character ay1” to “Character ay5”, respectively, at a predetermined timing. This is a notice effect (addition effect without operation) that is displayed on the image display device 14 and outputs the character notice sounds AY1 to AY5 (sound numbers: CAY1 to CAY5) from the sound output device 15.

  In the tables of FIGS. 43A and 43B, when the “character notice AY” shown in the table of FIG. 39 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot is “character notice AY1” which is the highest. The execution ratio of “character notice AY1” to “character notice AY5” is set so as to become lower as it becomes “notice AY2” to “character notice AY5”.

  “Development advance notice AY1” is a reach (“super reach” or “special reach”) that has a higher expectation for jackpot than “normal reach” in the latter half of “normal reach” of the variable production executed in “production mode AY”. The effect of development is notified by a “success effect” described later. In this “development notice AY1”, as in the “development notice AX1”, an operation promotion notification is made to prompt a continuous operation during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A, and the operation effective period remains for 1 second. If this is the case, each time the first effect button 18A is pressed once, the gauge meter value displayed on the image display device 14 decreases by the number of reductions determined in the lottery described later. Operation sound 2-1 "(sound number: S2-1 (picone)) is output.

  When the operation effective period is less than 1 second, an image with a meter value of 0 is displayed by the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and “operation sound 2-1” is displayed as the operation sound. Instead of (sound number: S2-1 (picone)), “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2 (Kahn)) is output. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “success effect” composed of a character image (“success !!” (font Y)) and a sound (HAY1: “success” (voice Y)) is executed. After that, it is informed that the current “normal reach” will develop into a “super reach” with a higher expectation for jackpot.

  “Development advance notice AY2” is a reach (“super reach” or “special reach”) that has a higher expectation for jackpot than “normal reach” in the latter half of “normal reach” of the fluctuation production executed in “production mode AY”. The fact that it does not develop is notified by a “failure effect” described later. In this “advance notice AY2,” like the “advance notice AX2,” an operation promotion notification is made to prompt a continuous operation during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A, and the operation effective period remains for 1 second. If this is the case, each time the first effect button 18A is pressed once, the gauge meter value displayed on the image display device 14 decreases by the number of reductions determined in the lottery, along with “operation sound”. “2-1” (sound number: S2-1 (picone)) is output.

  When the operation effective period is less than 1 second, the meter value does not become 0 and “operation sound 2-1” is output even by the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period. . Then, as a corresponding effect, a “failure effect” composed of a character image (“failure!” (Character Y)) and a sound (HAY2: “failure” (voice Y)) is executed. Thereafter, the middle symbol of the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol having a numerical value different from that of the left symbol and the right symbol, thereby informing that the determination result of the jackpot is “losing”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines the decrease number of the meter value at the determination ratio shown in the meter value decrease number determination table shown in FIG. 47, and decreases the meter value by the determined decrease number. As shown in FIG. 47, in this meter value reduction number determination table, “development advance notice AY1” is more than “development advance notice AY2”, and “big hit” is more than the case where the jackpot determination result is “lost”. Is set so that a larger value is selected at a higher rate as the number of decrease of the gauge meter value in the operation effective period of 1 second or more.

  Further, in the variation effects of the variation effect patterns AY007 and AY008 determined based on the special figure change pattern designation commands E6H03H and E7H03H in the tables of FIGS. 43A and 43B, the “normal reach” is developed to the next reach. Therefore, the “development notice AY2” for performing the “failure effect” is executed, and the operation sound of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period remains “operation sound 2-1.”

  On the other hand, in the variation effect of the variation effect patterns AY015 and AY016 determined based on the special figure change pattern designation commands E6H07H and E7H07H, the “successful announcement” AY1 is performed to develop the “success effect” from the “normal reach” to the next reach. The operation sound of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period is changed from “operation sound 2-1” to “operation sound 2-2”.

  Further, the fluctuation effect patterns AY019 and AY020 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H09H and E7H09H, the fluctuation presentation patterns AY021 and AY022 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0AH and E7H0AH, and the special figure fluctuation pattern Fluctuation effect patterns AY025 and AY026 determined based on the designation commands E6H0CH and E7H0CH, Fluctuation effect patterns AY027 and AY028 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0DH and E7H0DH, and special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0FH and E7H0FH Similarly, “development notice AY1” is executed for the variation effects of the variation effect patterns AY031 and AY032 determined based on the above.

“Selif notice AY” is executed during “super reach” in the production mode AY.
“Selif notice AY1” is effective when the non-projecting first effect button 18A is pressed during the operation effective period, and “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1) is sounded when the first effect button 18A is pressed. Output from the output device 15. Then, based on the fact that the first effect button 18A is pressed during the operation effective period, “Character Y”, which is a character unique to the effect mode AY, says a line “Furious!”. The image of the contents (the image of “Character Y” and the image of the line “Flame heat!”) Are displayed on the image display device 14, and “Serif notice AY1 effect sound” (sound number: RAY 1 (“extreme heat” (voice Y))) is output from the sound output device 15.

  In “Selif Notice AY2,” a character “Character Y”, which is a character unique to the effect mode AY, is “hot!” Based on the first effect button 18A being pressed during the operation valid period. Is displayed on the image display device 14 and the “speech notice AY2 effect sound” (sound) is displayed as the sound of the speech. Except for outputting the number: RAY2 ("hot" (voice Y))) from the sound output device 15, the same effect as the "line notice AY1" is performed.

  In “Selif Notice AY3”, the character unique to the effect mode AY says a line “Chance!” Based on the fact that the first effect button 18A is pressed during the operation valid period. The image (the image of “Character Y” and the image of the line “Hot !!”) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the “line announcement AY3 effect sound” (sound number: RAY 3 (“chance” "(Sound Y))) is output from the sound output device 15, the same effect as" Serial notice AY1 "is performed.

“Decision effect AY” is executed during “special reach” in effect mode AY.
The “decision effect AY1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member when the determination result of the jackpot is “big hit”, and not to move when it is “lost”. is there. In this “decision effect AY1,” an operation promotion notification is made to prompt the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and the first effect button 18A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation effective period. Corresponding to the case where the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or the case of a loss based on the operation being performed or the operation effective period elapses without the first effect button 18A being operated during the operation effective period The corresponding production is executed.

  Note that in the “determination effect AY1”, the state of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period may be a non-projecting state. Alternatively, for example, when the jackpot determination result is “losing”, “projecting state” is selected at a rate of 20%, “non-projecting state” is selected at a rate of 80%, and when “big hit” is set, 80 is selected. The selection ratio may be set so that “protruding state” is selected at a rate of% and “non-projecting state” is selected at a rate of 20%.

As a corresponding effect of the “decision effect AY1” at the time of the big hit, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-2”, and an effect image (“effect Ya” is displayed as an image) A corresponding effect such as displaying “determined effect AY (winning) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAYa) from the sound output device 15 is displayed.
As a corresponding effect of the “decision effect AY1” at the time of losing, the effect image (“effect Yb” is displayed on the image display device 14 without moving the first decorative member 17A and the “decision effect AY (lost) corresponding effect sound” is displayed. ”(Sound number: KAYb) is output from the sound output device 15.

In the “decision effect AY2,” the operation effective period is not set, and the corresponding effect corresponding to each of the cases where the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or lost is executed at a predetermined timing (additional effect without operation).
As the corresponding effect of the “decision effect AY2” at the time of the big hit, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-2” in the same way as the “decision effect AY1”. A corresponding effect such as displaying an image (“effect Ya” on the image display device 14 and outputting a “decision effect AY (hit) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAYa) from the sound output device 15 is executed.
As the corresponding effect of “decision effect AY2” at the time of losing, the effect image (“effect Yb” is displayed on the image display device 14 without moving the first decorative member 17A, as in “decision effect AY1”. A corresponding effect such as “determination effect AY (lost) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAYb) is output from the sound output device 15 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 43A and 43B, the “decided effect AY1” is higher in the “decided effect AY1” than the “decided effect AY2” in the “decided effect AY”. The execution ratio of “effect AY1” and “decision effect AY2” is set. In other words, the “decision effect AY1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

45 and 46 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an additional effect type determination table for determining the type of each additional effect for each variation effect pattern of the “effect mode AZ”. FIG. 45A is a diagram showing an additional effect type determination table for determining the type of each additional effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode AZ when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 45 (b) shows each addition for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode AZ when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the additional production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B, the execution ratio (%) of “character notice AZ (1) 1” to “character notice AZ (1) 5” as “character notice AZ (1)” is shown. Is set, and the execution ratio (%) of “Character notice AZ (2) 1” to “Character notice AZ (2) 5” as “Character notice AZ (2)” is set, and “Development notice AZ” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “Development Notice AZ1” and “Development Notice AZ2” is set, and the execution ratio (%) of “Serif Notice AZ1” to “Serif Notice AZ3” as “Selif Notice AZ” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect AZ1” and “decided effect AZ2” as “decided effect AZ” is set.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an additional effect information table that stores setting contents for each type of additional effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode AZ.
FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a “character notice AZ (1) information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice AZ (1)” in the effect mode AZ.
FIG. 46B is a diagram showing a “character notice AZ (2) information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “character notice AZ (2)” in the effect mode AZ.
FIG. 46C shows a “development notice AZ information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice AZ” in the production mode AZ. FIG. 46D is a diagram showing a “line notice AZ information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “line notice AZ” in the effect mode AX. FIG. 46E is a diagram showing a “determined effect AZ information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect AZ” in the effect mode AZ.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern of the effect mode AZ based on the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, which of the types of additional effects set in the table of FIG. 46 is executed is shown in FIG. Based on the execution ratio shown in the table of (b), it is determined by lottery.

  Note that “decision effect AZ” is not limited to an example in which the presence / absence of execution and the type of execution are determined by lottery, as in “decision effect AX” and “decision effect AY”. The presence / absence of execution and the type of execution may be determined based on the variation effect pattern of the effect mode AZ.

In this case, in the case of the fluctuating effect for executing the above-mentioned “decision effect AZ”, the fluctuating effect pattern determined when the jackpot determination result is “hit”, and determined when the jackpot determination result is “losing” Each of the variation effect patterns to be executed is executed in the “special reach” with the content that the main character (swordsman) and the enemy character unique to the AZ mode fight, and the “decision effect AZ” is performed during the effect. I do.
In this case, if the “decision effect AZ” is “big hit”, after the first decorative member 17A moves, the effect that the main character defeats the enemy character is given, and the big hit is notified. On the other hand, in the “decision effect AZ”, if it is “losing”, the first decorative member 17A does not move, but the hero character is brought down by the enemy character, and a “special effect” is notified. Reach production of “Reach”.

  Also, for example, in the case of a variation effect that does not execute the “decision effect AZ”, in the variation effect pattern when the determination result of the jackpot is “hit”, the character (swordsman) of the main character is another character in the “special reach” In the variation production pattern in which the effect that the end of the happy ending is met with the (princess unique to AZ mode) and the jackpot judgment result is “losing”, the character of the main character (swordsman) in “Special Reach” ) Does not meet the princess character unique to the AZ mode, and the image display device 14 produces an effect that the image is darkened and ends in a bad end.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), “Character notice AZ (1) 1” to “Character notice AZ (1) 5” do not set an operation valid period, and “Character az (1)” at a predetermined timing. ) 1 ”to“ Character az (1) 5 ”effect images are displayed on the image display device 14, and character announcements AZ (1) 1 to AZ (1) 5 effect sounds (sound numbers: CAZ (1) 1 to CAZ) (1) This is a notice effect (addition effect without operation) for outputting 5) from the sound output device 15.

  In the tables of FIGS. 45A and 45B, when the “character notice AZ (1)” shown in the table of FIG. 40 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot is “character notice AZ (1) 1”. "Is the highest, and" Character notice AZ (1) 1 "to" Character notice AZ (1) 5 "decreases so as to become lower as" Character notice AZ (1) 2 "to" Character notice AZ (1) 5 ". ”Is set.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), “Character notice AZ (2) 1” to “Character notice AZ (2) 5” do not set the operation valid period, and “Character az (2)” at a predetermined timing. ) 1 ”to“ Character az (2) 5 ”effect images are displayed on the image display device 14, and character announcements AZ (2) 1 to AZ (2) 5 effect sounds (sound numbers: CAZ (2) 1 to CAZ) (2) This is a notice effect (addition effect without operation) for outputting 5) from the sound output device 15.

  In the tables of FIGS. 45A and 45B, when the “character notice AZ (2)” shown in the table of FIG. 40 is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot is “character notice AZ (2) 1”. "Is the highest, and" Character notice AZ (2) 1 "to" Character notice AZ (2) 5 "decreases so as to decrease from" Character notice AZ (2) 2 "to" Character notice AZ (2) 5 ". ”Is set.

  45 (a) and 45 (b), in “Character notice AZ (2)”, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is “Character notice AZ (2) 1”, and “Character notice AZ (2)”. ) 2 ”to“ character notice AZ (2) 5 ”, the execution ratio of“ character notice AZ (2) 1 ”to“ character notice AZ (2) 5 ”is set.

  “Development notice AZ1” is a reach (“super reach” or “special reach”) that has a higher expectation for jackpot than “normal reach” in the latter half of “normal reach” of the fluctuation production executed in “direction mode AZ”. The effect of development is notified by a “success effect” described later. In this “development notice AZ1”, similar to “development notice AX1” and “development notice AY1,” an operation promotion notification is made to prompt a continuous hit operation during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A. If the effective period is 1 second or more, each time the first effect button 18A is pressed once, the gauge meter value displayed on the image display device 14 decreases by the number of reductions determined by lottery. Together with this, “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1 (picone)) is output. When the operation effective period is less than 1 second, an image with a meter value of 0 is displayed by the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period, and “operation sound 2-1” is displayed as the operation sound. Instead of (sound number: S2-1 (picone)), “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2 (Kahn)) is output. Then, as a corresponding effect, a “success effect” composed of a character image (“success !!” (font Z)) and a sound (HAZ1: “success” (voice Z)) is executed. After that, it is informed that the current “normal reach” will develop into a “super reach” with a higher expectation for jackpot.

  “Development Notice AZ2” is a reach (“Super Reach” or “Special Reach”) that has a higher expectation for jackpot than “Normal Reach” in the latter half of “Normal Reach” of the fluctuating production performed in “Direction Mode AZ”. The fact that it does not develop is notified by a “failure effect” described later. In the “development notice AZ2”, similar to the “development notice AX2” and “development notice AX2,” an operation promotion notification for prompting repeated hitting operation is performed during the operation effective period (5 seconds) of the first effect button 18A. If the effective period is 1 second or more, each time the first effect button 18A is pressed once, the gauge meter value displayed on the image display device 14 decreases by the number of reductions determined by lottery. Together with this, “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1 (picone)) is output. When the operation effective period is less than 1 second, the meter value does not become 0 and “operation sound 2-1” is output even by the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period. . Then, as a corresponding effect, a “failure effect” composed of a character image (“failure !!” (font Z)) and a sound (HAZ2: “failure” (voice Z)) is executed. Thereafter, the middle symbol of the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol having a numerical value different from that of the left symbol and the right symbol, thereby informing that the determination result of the jackpot is “losing”.

  The sub CPU 102a determines the decrease number of the meter value at the determination ratio shown in the meter value decrease number determination table shown in FIG. 47, and decreases the meter value by the determined decrease number. As shown in FIG. 47, in this meter value reduction number determination table, “development notice AZ1” is more than “development notice AZ2”, and “big hit” is more than the case where the determination result of jackpot is “losing”. Is set so that a larger value is selected at a higher rate as the number of decrease of the gauge meter value in the operation effective period of 1 second or more.

  Further, in the variation effects of the variation effect patterns AZ007 and AZ008 determined based on the special figure change pattern designation commands E6H03H and E7H03H in the tables of FIGS. 45A and 45B, the “normal reach” is developed to the next reach. Therefore, the “development notice AZ2” for performing the “failure effect” is executed, and the operation sound of the first effect button 18A during the operation valid period remains “operation sound 2-1.”

  On the other hand, in the variation effect patterns AZ015 and AZ016 determined based on the special figure variation pattern designation commands E6H07H and E7H07H, the “successful announcement” AZ1 is performed in order to develop from “normal reach” to the next reach. The operation sound of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period is changed from “operation sound 2-1” to “operation sound 2-2”.

  Further, the fluctuation effect patterns AZ019 and AZ020 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H09H and E7H09H, the fluctuation presentation patterns AY021 and AY022 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0AH and E7H0AH, the special figure fluctuation pattern Fluctuation effect patterns AY025 and AY026 determined based on the designation commands E6H0CH and E7H0CH, Fluctuation effect patterns AY027 and AY028 determined based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0DH and E7H0DH, and special figure fluctuation pattern designation commands E6H0FH and E7H0FH Similarly, “development notice AY1” is executed for the variation effects of the variation effect patterns AY031 and AY032 determined based on the above.

“Selif Notice AZ” is executed during “Super Reach” in the production mode AZ.
“Selif notice AZ1” is valid when the first effect button 18A in the non-projecting state is pressed during the operation valid period, and “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1) is sounded when the first effect button 18A is pressed. Output from the output device 15. Then, based on the fact that the first effect button 18A is pressed during the operation effective period, “Character Z”, which is a character unique to the effect mode AZ, says a line “Furious”! An image of the contents (an image of “Character Z” and an image of the line “Super heat!”) Are displayed on the image display device 14, and “Serif notice AZ1 effect sound” (sound number: RAZ1 (“extreme heat” (voice Z))) is output from the sound output device 15.

  In the “serif notice AZ2”, the character “character Z”, which is a character unique to the effect mode AZ, is “hot!” Based on the first effect button 18A being pressed during the operation valid period. Is displayed on the image display device 14 and the “voice announcement AZ2 effect sound” (sound) is displayed as the voice of the speech. No .: RAZ2 (“hot” (voice Z))) is output from the sound output device 15, and the same effects as “Serial notice AZ1” are performed.

  In the “line preview AZ3”, the character unique to the effect mode AZ says a line “chance !!” based on the pressing of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period. The image (the image of “Character Z” and the image of the line “hot!”) Is displayed on the image display device 14, and the “line announcement AZ3 effect sound” (sound number: RAZ3 (“chance” "(Voice Z)))" is output from the sound output device 15, and the same effect as "Serif notice AZ1" is performed.

The “decision effect AZ” is executed during the “special reach” of the effect mode AZ.
The “decision effect AZ1” is to move the first decorative member 17A as a movable member when the jackpot determination result is “big hit”, and not to move when it is “lost”. is there. In the “determination effect AZ1”, an operation promotion notification that urges the operation of the first effect button 18A is executed during the operation effective period, and the first effect button 18A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation effective period. Corresponding to the case where the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or the case of a loss based on the operation being performed or the operation effective period elapses without the first effect button 18A being operated during the operation effective period The corresponding production is executed. Note that in the “decision effect AZ1”, the state of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period may be a non-projecting state. Alternatively, for example, when the jackpot determination result is “losing”, “projecting state” is selected at a rate of 20%, “non-projecting state” is selected at a rate of 80%, and when “big hit” is set, 80 is selected. The selection ratio may be set so that “protruding state” is selected at a rate of% and “non-projecting state” is selected at a rate of 20%.

As a corresponding effect of the “decision effect AZ1” at the time of the big hit, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-2”, and further, an effect image (“effect Za” is displayed as an image) A corresponding effect such as displaying “determined effect AZ (winning) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAZa) from the sound output device 15 is displayed.
As the corresponding effect of the “decision effect AZ1” at the time of the loss, the effect image (“effect Zb”) is displayed on the image display device 14 without moving the first decorative member 17A, and the “decision effect AZ (lost) corresponding effect sound” is displayed. ”(Sound number: KAZb) is output from the sound output device 15.

In the “decision effect AZ2,” the operation effective period is not set, and the corresponding effect corresponding to each of the cases where the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or lost is executed at a predetermined timing (additional effect without operation).
As the corresponding effect of the “decision effect AZ2” at the time of the big hit, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-2” in the same way as the “decision effect AZ1”. A corresponding effect such as displaying an image (“effect Za” on the image display device 14 and outputting a “decided effect AZ (winning) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAZa) from the sound output device 15 is executed.
As a corresponding effect of the “decision effect AZ2” at the time of the loss, the effect image (“effect Zb” is displayed on the image display device 14 without moving the first decorative member 17A, as in the “decision effect AZ1”. A corresponding effect such as “determination effect AZ (lost) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAZb) is output from the sound output device 15 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 45A and 45B, the “decision effect AZ1” has a higher degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot than the “decision effect AZ2”. Execution ratios of “effect AZ1” and “decision effect AZ2” are set. In other words, the “decision effect AZ1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

(Variation effect pattern determination processing by effect control board)
The variation effect control process in the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, so that the current effect set in the effect mode setting process in step S1308 of FIG. The mode is confirmed, and the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the current effect mode is selected.

  In step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect modes AX to AZ”. For this, the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect modes AX to AZ shown in FIGS. 38 to 40 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode B”. For this, a variation effect pattern determination table associated with “effect mode B” (not shown) is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1312-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode C”. For this, a variation effect pattern determination table associated with “effect mode C” (not shown) is selected.

  In step S1312-2, the sub CPU 102a checks the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, in each effect mode, one or more variable effect patterns are stored in association with the change effect pattern determination value for each special figure change pattern designation command. The variation effect pattern is identification information representing the effect contents of the variation effect, and is associated with a specific effect mode of the variation effect.

  The variation effect pattern is associated with the elements of the variation effect such as the time of the change effect, the variation display mode of the special effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the contents of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. In addition, the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the image display device 14 includes the display mode of the variation display of the special effect symbol and the display mode related to the object image and the background image composed of characters and the like. Are associated with each other.

  In step S1312--3, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random effect pattern determination random number. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the random effect pattern determination random number in the random effect storage pattern random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by comparing the variation effect pattern determination random number stored in the variation effect pattern determination random number storage area with the selected variation effect pattern determination table. Process.

  In step S1312-5, the sub CPU 102a performs execution (O) and non-execution (x) information (FIG. 38, etc.) associated with the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined in step S1312-4. In the variation effect of the determined variation effect pattern, it is determined whether or not an additional effect is to be executed. When the sub CPU 102a executes the additional effect, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1312-6, and when determining that the additional effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1312-8.

  In step S1312-6, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining, by lottery, the type of additional effect associated with the variable effect pattern determined in step S1312-4. For example, based on the execution ratio shown in FIG. 41 (b), the sub CPU 102a uses any one of “development notice A1” and “development notice AX2” of “development notice AX” as an additional effect of “variation presentation pattern AX021”. Is determined by lottery.

  In step S1312-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the process of determining the type of additional effect in step S1312-6 has ended. If it is determined that the process has ended, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1312-8. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S1312-6.

  In step S1312-8, the sub CPU 102a confirms the effect data when effect data indicating that the zone effect is to be executed is stored by the process of step S1305-4 in FIG.

  In step S1312-9, the sub CPU 102a adds to the variation effect control command corresponding to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1312-4, the additional effect of the type determined in step S1312-6, and the effect data confirmed in step S1312-8. Is included, and the change effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  In step S1312-10, the sub CPU 102a stores the variation effect data corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect time of the variation effect in the variation effect timer counter. . The variation effect timer counter is incremented by “4” in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the variation effect at the present time by the variation effect timer counter.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1400. Then, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the change effect based on the change effect control command received from the effect control board 102, and outputs the sound data of the change effect from the sound output device 15. Control. The lamp control board 104 performs operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and illumination control of the effect lighting device 16 in the changing effect based on the changing effect control command received from the effect control board 102.

  In addition, the image control board 105 controls the display of the effect image on the image display device 14 at the execution timing of the additional effect based on the control content of the change effect specified by the change effect control command received from the effect control board 102. And the control which outputs the production sound in an additional production from the sound output device 15 is performed. In addition, the lamp control board 104 performs operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and illumination control of the effect lighting device 16 in the additional effect based on the variable effect control command received from the effect control board 102.

Next, processing performed on the image control board 105 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a main process of the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa included in the image control board 105.

  The main process shown in FIG. 48 is performed when a power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and a system reset occurs.

  In step S2001, when power is supplied from the power supply board 107, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the interrupt prohibition flag to ON in the flag storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac in order to prohibit interruption of external signals.

In step S2002, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs an initialization process. In the initialization process of step S2002, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa reads the main processing program from the liquid crystal control ROM 105c and instructs the initial settings of the various modules of the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and the VDP 105Ba when the power is turned on.
The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, as an instruction for initial setting of the VDP 105Ba, (1) instructs the display circuit that constitutes the VDP 105Ba to generate and output a video signal. (2) Image data that is frequently used (image data such as special effect designs) is expanded to the image data development area (not shown) of the VRAM 105Be. In order to develop the image, the predetermined initial value data is set in the decompression register, or (3) the initial value image data (such as a character image “power-on”) is drawn in the drawing circuit constituting the VDP 105Ba. Output initial value display list.

  In step S2003, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the interrupt prohibition flag to OFF in the flag storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac in order to permit interruption of an external signal.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa. When the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa receives a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) output every 1/60 seconds (about 16.6 ms) from the VDP 105Ba, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa executes the V blank interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In step S2010, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs a process of updating various counters such as “scene switching counter”, “wait frame”, and “frame counter”.

  In step S2020, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa instructs the memory controller included in the VDP 105Ba to switch between the “display frame buffer” and the “drawing frame buffer”. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs a process of incrementing to the first bit of the display register (a process of adding “1”).

  In step S2100, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs game hall side volume adjustment processing. Details of the processing in step S2100 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S2200, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs an effect input control process. Details of the processing in step S2200 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S2300, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs image designation processing. The liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa is bundled with one or more “animation patterns” that specify the timing of image display and scenes (scenes) in the animation, in addition to objects constituting the animation displayed on the image display device 14. A plurality of “animation groups” formed by this are stored. This “animation group” includes, for example, a background group for displaying a background image, a notice group for displaying a character image used for a notice, a reach group for displaying a character image for reach production, In addition to the jackpot effect group for displaying the effect image, the special effect symbol group for displaying the image of the special effect symbol, the menu selection screen group for displaying the image of the menu selection screen, and the error notification image are displayed. There are error groups and so on.

The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates one or more “animation groups” from a plurality of “animation groups” stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, designates an “animation pattern” from each designated “animation group”, and designates them. By setting the information (image information) of the “animation pattern” in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, an image is designated. The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines the scene of the image displayed on the image display device 14 based on the designated “image pattern” and the “scene switching counter”, “weight frame”, and “frame counter” updated for each frame. Update the (scene) address. Note that the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa does not perform the process of step S2300 if image information is set in the image information setting area in the V blank interruption process from the next time onward.
Details of the processing in step S2300 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S2400, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, based on the image information set in the image information setting area in step S2300, in accordance with the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group of the scene whose address is updated, the scene at the updated address. A display list for displaying the image designated in step S2300 on the image display device 14 is generated from the display information of one frame (sprite identification number, display position, etc.). After the display list is generated, the display list is displayed. Is transmitted (output) to the VDP 105Ba. The transmitted display list is stored in the display list storage area of the VRAM 153. The VDP 105Ba draws an image in the “drawing frame buffer” based on the display list, reads the image data from the “display frame buffer” switched from the “drawing frame buffer”, and outputs the image data to the image display device 14. As a result, an image is displayed on the image display device 14.
Note that the image information set in the image information setting area is erased (cleared) when the display of the image designated in step S2300 on the image display device 14 is stopped.

  In step S2500, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs sound designation processing for designating sound information of sound data to be output when displaying the image designated in step S2300. Details of the processing in step S2500 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step 2600, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs a sound reproduction control process. Details of the processing in step S2600 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step 2700, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs a symbol variation effect sound volume change control process. Details of the processing in step S2700 will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game hall-side volume adjustment processing in step S2100.
In step S2101, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the switch level ("0" to "5") designated by the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine Y in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. It is determined whether or not the corresponding volume level initial value (“0” to “5”) has already been set. If it is determined that the volume level has been set, the process moves to step S2102 and is not set. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S2104. In this step S2101, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs the process of step S2101 for the first time after the data stored in the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac is erased by the RAM clear process after turning on the power to the gaming machine Y. Is determined that the initial value of the sound volume level is not set.

The volume level initial value (“0” to “5”) is a start value (initial value) of the volume level in the master volume that can be changed by the player.
The initial volume level “0” corresponds to “0 dB” of the master volume, the volume level “1” corresponds to “50 dB” of the master volume, and the volume level “2” corresponds to “60 dB” of the master volume. The volume level “3” corresponds to the master volume “70 dB”, the volume level “4” corresponds to the master volume “80 dB”, and the volume level “5” corresponds to the maximum master volume. This corresponds to “90 dB”.

  In step S2102, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the switch level of the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 has been changed. If the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that the switch level has been changed, the process proceeds to step S2103. If so, the process moves to step S2105.

  In step S2103, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa stores a volume level initial value corresponding to the changed value in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab based on the change of the switch level of the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30. 84 is determined based on the adjustment volume information table shown in FIG.

  In step S2104, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines a volume level initial value corresponding to the current switch level of the game hall side volume adjustment switch 30 based on the adjustment volume information table shown in FIG.

  In step S2105, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a volume level initial value designation command indicating the volume level initial value determined in step S2103 or step S2104 and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba, and ends the game hall volume adjustment processing.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the effect input control process of step S2200 of FIG.
In step S2201, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether any operation has been performed by the player based on whether any operation detection signal has been received. The process moves to step S2202, and if it is determined that there is no operation, the process moves to step S2206.

  In step S2202, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not it is in the effect mode selectable period, which is a period in which the effect modes AX to AZ can be selected by the player's operation, and in the effect mode selectable period. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step S2203, and if it is determined that it is not during the effect mode selectable period, the process proceeds to step S2204.

  In step S2203, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs an effect mode A change process. Details of the processing in step S2203 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 2204, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa displays the operation effective period (development advance notice operation) executed in the currently set effect mode among the “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, and “effect mode AZ”. If it is determined whether or not it is during the advance notice operation valid period, the process proceeds to step S2205. The process moves to S2207.

  In step S2205, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs an advance notice operation image designation process. Details of the processing in step S2205 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S2206, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs development notice corresponding effect image designation processing. Details of the processing in step S2206 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 2207, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa performs an operation valid period (line advance notification operation) in the speech advance notice executed in the currently set effect mode among the “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, and “effect mode AZ”. In the case where it is determined whether or not it is in the effective period of the serif advance notice operation, the process proceeds to step S2208, and in the case where it is determined that it is not in the effective period of the serif advance notice operation, The process moves to S2209.

  In step S2208, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs a speech preview image designation process. If the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that the operation at the time of determining that the operation has been performed in step S2201 is a pressing operation of the first effect button 18A, the operation is performed among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Sometimes, an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 (for example, an effect image indicating that the first effect button 18A has been pressed) and an image of the corresponding effect to be displayed based on the operation are designated.

  In step S <b> 2209, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa performs an operation effective period (determined effect operation) in the determined effect executed in the currently set effect mode among “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, and “effect mode AZ”. If it is determined whether or not it is during the determined rendering operation valid period, the process proceeds to step S2210, and if it is determined that it is not within the determined rendering operation valid period, The process moves to S2211.

  In step S2210, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs a determined effect image designation process. Details of the processing in step S2210 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S2211, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa receives the standby state designation command (not shown) transmitted from the main control board 101 due to the standby state in which no game effect is being executed, and in response to the demonstration effect control command. If it is determined whether it is in the “menu screen displayable period” that can display the menu screen, which consists of a period during which the demonstration production based on the If the process proceeds to step S2212, and it is determined that it is not in the “menu screen displayable period”, the effect input control process is hunted.

  In step S2212, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs menu control processing, and ends the effect input control processing. Details of the processing in step S2212 will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining the effect mode A changing process in step S2203 of FIG.
In step S2203-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the player's operation determined to have been operated in step S2201 in FIG. 51 is an operation of the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A, and the right If it is determined that the operation is for the unit 194A, the process proceeds to step S2203-2, and if it is determined that the operation is not the operation for the right part 194A, the process proceeds to step S2203-6.

In step S2203-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the count value C = 2 of the “effect mode A loop counter” in the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. The “production mode A loop counter” is a counter for setting any one of the production modes AX to AZ, and C = 0 to 2 can be set as the count value C. When C = 0, the effect mode AX is set, when C = 1, the effect mode AY is set, and when C = 2, the effect mode AZ is set.
The “effect mode A loop counter” increases the count value C by 1 every time the right part 194A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, and when the right part 194A is pressed in the state of C = 2, = 0 updated. On the other hand, in the “effect mode A loop counter”, the count value C decreases by 1 each time the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A is pressed, and the left portion 192A is pressed in the state of C = 0. And C = 2.
In step S2401-3, when the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” is C = 2, the process proceeds to step S2203-3, and it is determined that C = 2 is not satisfied. If so, the process moves to step S2203-4.

  In step S2203-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa updates the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” from C = 2 to C = 0.

  In step S2203-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs an update process for incrementing the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” by one.

  In step S2203-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs the effect mode in the effect mode according to the count value C updated in step S2203-3 or step S2203-4 among the effect mode AX, the effect mode AY, and the effect mode AZ. By storing the flags in the corresponding storage areas of the effect mode AX flag storage area, the effect mode AY flag storage area, and the effect mode AZ flag storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, the effect mode AX, the effect mode AY, or the effect mode AZ Is set, and the effect mode A changing process is terminated.

  In step S2203-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa corresponds to the effect mode AX when the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” is updated from C = 2 to C = 0 in step S2203-3. The effect mode AX flag is stored in the effect mode AX storage area, and the effect mode AX is set. Alternatively, in step S2203-5, when the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa updates the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” to C = 1 in step S2203-4, the effect mode corresponding to the effect mode AY. When the effect mode AY is set by storing the AY flag in the effect mode AY flag storage area and updated to C = 2, the effect mode AZ flag corresponding to the effect mode AZ is stored in the effect mode AZ flag storage area. Then, the production mode AZ is set.

  In step S2203-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the player's operation determined to have been operated in step S2201 of FIG. 51 is an operation of the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A. When it is determined that the operation is for the part 192A, the process proceeds to step S2203-7, and when it is determined that the operation is not for the left part 192A, the effect mode A changing process is terminated.

  In step S2203-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the count value C = 0 of the “production mode A loop counter”. If it is determined that C = 0, the process proceeds to step S2203-8. If it is determined that C = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2203-9.

  In step S2203-8, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa updates the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” from C = 0 to C = 2.

  In step S2203-9, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs an update process for reducing the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” by one.

  In step S2203-10, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs the effect mode in the effect mode according to the count value C updated in step S2203-8 or step S2203-9 among the effect mode AX, the effect mode AY, and the effect mode AZ. By storing the flag in the corresponding flag storage area of the effect mode AX flag storage area, the effect mode AY flag storage area, and the effect mode AZ flag storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, the effect mode AX, the effect mode AY, or The effect mode AZ is set, and the effect mode A changing process is terminated.

  In step S2203-10, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa corresponds to the effect mode AZ when the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” is updated from C = 0 to C = 2 in step S2203-8. The effect mode AZ flag is stored in the effect mode AZ flag storage area, and the effect mode AZ is set. Alternatively, in this step S2203-10, when the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa updates the count value C of the “effect mode A loop counter” to C = 0 in step S2203-9, the effect mode corresponding to the effect mode AX. When the production mode AX is set by storing the AX flag in the production mode AX flag storage area and updated to C = 1, the production mode AY flag corresponding to the production mode AY is stored in the production mode AY flag storage area. Then, the effect mode AY is set, and the effect mode A changing process is terminated.

  FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the image designating process at the time of advance notice operation in step S2205 of FIG.

  In step S2205-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the player's operation determined to have been operated in step S2201 is the operation of the first effect button 18A, and the operation of the first effect button 18A is performed. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step S2205-2, and if it is determined that the operation is not an operation of the first effect button 18A, the image designating process for the advance notice operation is terminated.

  In step S2205-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs an update process for incrementing the count value Cs by 1 in the operation number counter area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2205-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the remaining time of the advance notice operation valid period of 5 seconds is 1 second or longer based on a timer set in the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac (not shown). If it is determined that the remaining time is 1 second or longer, the process proceeds to step S2205-4. If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second, the process proceeds to step S2205-8.

  In step S2205-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa randomly draws the subtraction number of the meter value of the gauge displayed on the image display device 15, which will be described later, according to the count value Cs set in the operation number counter area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. Determined by This gauge displays the meter value 15 at the start of the operation effective period, and decreases based on the operation of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period.

  In this step S2205-4, if the count value Cs set in the operation number counter area is 0 to 10, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets “2” as 70% and “1” as the subtraction number of the gauge meter value. If the count value Cs set in the operation counter area is 11 or more, “2” is 30% and “1” is 70%. decide. The method for determining the subtraction number of the gauge meter value is not limited to this.

  In step S2205-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa has a value obtained by subtracting the subtraction number determined in step S2205-4 from the meter value of the gauge currently displayed on the image display device 14 (1 ≦ display). If it is determined that it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S2205-6. If it is determined that it is less than 1, the process proceeds to step S2205-7. Move processing.

  In step S2205-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa is an image of a meter value image obtained by subtracting the subtraction number from the displayed meter value determined in step S2205-5 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Information is set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. Thereby, an image of the meter value of the value obtained by subtracting the subtraction number from the currently displayed meter value is designated. Then, the image designating process at the time of the advance notice operation ends.

  In this way, in step S2205-4, the lottery of the subtraction number is drawn, and it is not determined in step S2205-5 (1 ≦ meter value being displayed−subtraction number), but in step S2205-4. Alternatively, a lottery may be performed without selecting a subtraction number larger than the meter value being displayed. In that case, the process of step S2205-5 and step S2205-7 is omitted.

  In step S2205-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the image information of the meter value 1 in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, thereby obtaining the image of the meter value 1. The image designation process at the time of the advance notice operation is finished.

  In step S2205-8, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa executes the “success effect” as the corresponding effect of the “development notice” based on the control content of the change effect specified by the change effect control command received from the effect control board 102. It is determined whether or not it is a variation effect pattern (“success effect pattern”), and if it is determined that it is a “success effect pattern”, the process proceeds to step S2205-9, If it is determined that the variation effect pattern (“failure effect pattern”) is executed as the corresponding effect of “development notice”, the process proceeds to step S2205-11.

  In step S2205-9, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the image information of the meter value 0 in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, thereby obtaining the image of the meter value 0. specify.

  In step S2205-10, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets “success effect designation flag” indicating that the “success effect” is to be executed as the corresponding effect of the advance notice in the flag setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. The notice image designation process is terminated.

  In step S2205-11, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets image information of an image with a meter value other than 0 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, so that it is other than 0. Specifies an image of the meter value. The “meter value other than 0” is a value that is 0 or more and smaller than the currently displayed meter value.

  In step S2205-12, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the “failure effect designation flag” indicating that the “failure effect” is to be executed as the corresponding effect of the advance notice in the flag setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac to ON. The image designation process at the time of the notice operation is terminated.

  In step S2400 described above, a display list for each frame for displaying the image specified in steps S2205-6, S2205-7, S2205-9, and S2205-11 is generated and output.

  FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the development notice corresponding effect image designation processing in step S2206 of FIG.

  In step S2206-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not it is the end of the operation valid period (development notice operation valid period) in the advance notice, and if it is determined that it is the end, step S2206-2. If it is determined that it is not the end time, the development notice corresponding effect image designation processing is ended.

  In step S2206-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the “success effect designation flag” is set to ON in the flag setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, and if it is determined that it is set to ON. Moves the process to step S2206-3, and moves the process to step S2206-5 if it is determined that the setting is not ON.

  In step S2206-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the image information of the image corresponding to the advance notice (success effect) according to the currently set effect mode among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. By setting it in the image information setting area, a successful effect image is designated.

  In step S2206-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the “success effect designation flag” to OFF in the flag setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, and ends the development notice corresponding effect image designation process.

  In step S2206-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the “failure effect designation flag” is set to ON in the flag setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, and if it is determined that the flag is set to ON. Shifts the processing to step S2206-6, and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, the development notice corresponding effect image designation processing ends.

  In step S2206-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the image information of the image corresponding to the advance notice (failure effect) corresponding to the currently set effect mode among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. The image of the failure effect is designated by setting in the image information setting area.

  In step S2400 described above, a display list for each frame for displaying the image specified in steps S2206-3 and S2206-6 is generated and output.

In step S2206-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the “failure effect designation flag” to OFF in the flag setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, and ends the development notice corresponding effect image designation process.
An example of the advance notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the determined effect image designation processing in step S2210 of FIG.
In step S2210-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the operation of the player who has determined that the operation has been performed in step S2201 is the operation of the first effect button 18A, and the operation of the first effect button 18A. If it is determined that there is an operation, the process proceeds to step S2210-2. If it is determined that the operation is not an operation of the first effect button 18A, the process proceeds to step S2210-3.

  In step S2210-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays an image displayed on the image display device 14 when the first effect button 18A is operated among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab (for example, the first effect button 18A is pressed down). The effect image indicating that it has been performed) is designated.

  In step S2210-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not it is the end of the operation effective period (determined effect operation effective period) in the determined effect, and if it is determined that it is the end, step S2210-4 If it is determined that it is not the end time, the determined effect designation process is terminated.

  In step S <b> 2210-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa executes a variation effect pattern (a jackpot pattern) that is executed when the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect control command received from the effect control board 102 is determined to be a “hit” in the jackpot determination. If it is determined that the pattern is a jackpot pattern, the process proceeds to step S2210-5. If it is determined that the pattern is not a jackpot pattern, the process proceeds to step S2210-7.

  In step S <b> 2210-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa sends a drive control signal for moving the first decorative member 17 </ b> A from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-2” via the effect control board 102. Send to. The lamp CPU 104a drives the first decorative member 17A by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effect accessory device 1701 by drive control based on the drive control signal. As a result, the first decorative member 17A moves from the “standby position 1” (original position) above the image display device 14 to the “operation position 1-1” that is the center position on the front surface of the image display device 14. Then, it moves to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2” via “operation position 1-1” and then to “operation position 1-1”. A moving operation such as returning to the “standby position 1” is performed.

  In step S2201-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, image information of the image corresponding to the jackpot corresponding effect (hit for jackpot) according to the currently set effect mode. Is set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, a big hit effect image is specified, and the determined effect image specifying process is terminated.

  In step S2201-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, image information of an image corresponding to a jackpot corresponding effect (lost effect) according to the currently set effect mode. Is set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, the image for the effect for losing is specified, and the determined effect image specifying process is terminated.

  In step S2400 described above, a display list for each frame for displaying the image specified in steps S2210-6 and S2210-7 is generated and output.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart for explaining the menu control processing in step S2212.

  In step S2212-1, when the customer wait designation command is transmitted from the main control board 101 (customer wait state), the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa does not display the menu screen on the image display device 14 or is displayed. If it is determined that the menu screen is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2212-2. If it is determined that the menu screen is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2212-4.

  In step S2212-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the player's operation determined to have been operated in step S2201 in FIG. 51 is an operation of the first effect button 18A, and the first effect button 18A. If it is determined that the operation is not performed, the process proceeds to step S2212-3. If it is determined that the operation is not the operation of the first effect button 18A, the menu control process is terminated.

  In step S2212-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the image information of the image of the menu selection screen for selecting a plurality of menu items shown in FIG. 92 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab in the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. By setting in the image information setting area, the image of the menu selection screen is designated. The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates an image on the menu selection screen even when a certain period of time has elapsed since the first effect button 18A is not operated and the customer waits. Also good.

  The menu selection screen shown in FIG. 92 has “volume adjustment” as a character image 510 indicating a menu that can be selected by the character image 510 “select menu” and the upper portion 191A and the lower portion 193A of the second effect button 19A. A character image 511 indicating a menu called “a character image 512 indicating a menu“ light amount adjustment ”, a character image 513 indicating a menu“ guide ”, a character image 514 indicating a menu“ return ”, and selection of these menus An image 515A of the second effect button 19A used in the above, a character image 515B of “Select”, an image 516A of the first effect button 18A used when determining the selected menu, and a character image 516B of “Determine” have.

  As shown in FIG. 92, a character image 511 indicating a menu item “volume adjustment”, a character image 512 indicating a menu item “light amount adjustment”, a character image 513 indicating a menu item “guide”, and a menu “return” Character images 514 indicating items are arranged and displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the menu screen in this order.

  In step S2212-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the menu selection screen is being displayed on the image display device 14, and if it is determined that the menu selection screen is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2212-5. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the menu selection screen is not being displayed, the process shifts to step S2212-20.

  In step S2212-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the player's operation determined to have been operated in step S2201 of FIG. 51 is an operation of the upper portion 191A of the second effect button 19A, and the upper portion 191A. If it is determined that the operation is an operation of the upper part 191A, the process proceeds to step S2212-6.

  In step S2212-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the top item (“volume adjustment” in FIG. 92) is selected on the menu selection screen, and the top item is selected. If it is determined that the current item is in the current state, the process proceeds to step S2212-8. If it is determined that the highest item is not selected, the process proceeds to step S2212-7.

  In step S2212-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets an image of an image for performing selection display indicating that the menu item one level above has been selected on the menu selection screen among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. By doing so, the image is designated.

  In step S2212-8, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the player's operation determined to have been operated in step S2201 in FIG. 51 is an operation of the lower portion 193A of the second effect button 19A, and the lower portion 193A. If it is determined that the operation is not the operation of the lower part 193A, the process proceeds to step S2212.

  In step S2212-9, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the lowest item ("Return" in FIG. 92) is selected on the menu selection screen, and the lowest item is selected. If it is determined that the current item is in the state, the menu control process is terminated. If it is determined that the lowest item is not selected, the process proceeds to step S2212-10.

  In step S <b> 2212-10, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa displays image information of an image for performing selection display indicating that the next lower menu item has been selected on the menu selection screen among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105 </ b> Ab. The image is designated by setting it in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2212-11, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the player's operation determined to have been operated in step S2201 of FIG. 51 is an operation of the first effect button 18A, and the first effect button 18A. If it is determined that the operation is not performed, the process proceeds to step S2212-12. If it is determined that the operation is not the operation of the first effect button 18A, the menu control process is terminated.

  In step S2212-12, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not “volume adjustment” has been determined as a menu item on the menu selection screen shown in FIG. The process moves to S2212-13, and if it is determined that “volume adjustment” has not been determined, the process moves to S2212-14.

In step S2212-13, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa is currently set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be as a “volume adjustment screen” for performing “volume adjustment” among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. The image information of the image of the “volume adjustment screen” (any one of FIGS. 93A to 93E) for notifying the volume level is referred to in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. To designate the image of the “volume adjustment screen”.
The volume display screen shown in any of FIGS. 93A to 93E is displayed on the image display device 14.

  Here, when the volume level “1” is set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105e, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 93A showing “1” as the volume level in the volume gauge. When the volume level “2” is set, the volume adjustment screen image of FIG. 93 (b) indicating “2” as the volume level is specified in the volume gauge, and the volume level “3” is specified. ”Is set, an image of the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 93 (c) showing“ 3 ”as the volume level in the volume gauge is designated, and when the volume level“ 4 ”is set, When the image of the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 93 (d) showing “4” as the volume level in the volume gauge is designated and the volume level “5” is set, the volume level is set in the volume gauge. Designating an image volume control screen of Fig. 93 showing a "5" as the bell (e).

  In step S2212-14, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not “light amount adjustment” has been determined as a menu item on the menu selection screen shown in FIG. 92, and if it is determined that “light amount adjustment” has been determined, step is performed. The process moves to S2212-15, and if it is determined that “light intensity adjustment” has not been determined, the process moves to S2212-16.

  In step S <b> 2212-15, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa displays image information of an image on a “light amount adjustment screen” (not shown) for performing “light amount adjustment” among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105 </ b> Ab. The image of the “light quantity adjustment screen” is designated by setting in the image information setting area.

  In step S2212-16, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not “guide” is determined as the menu item on the menu selection screen shown in FIG. 92. If it is determined that “guide” is determined, step S2212— If it is determined that “Guide” has not been determined, the process proceeds to step S2212-18.

  In step S2212-17, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the image information of the image of the “guide screen” (not shown) in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, thereby designating the image of the “guide screen”. .

  In step S2212-18, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not “return” has been determined as a menu item on the menu selection screen shown in FIG. 92. If it is determined that “return” has been determined, step S2212— If the process moves to 19 and it is determined that “return” has not been determined, the menu control process ends.

  In step S2212-19, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa clears the image information set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac in order to stop displaying the menu selection screen currently displayed on the image display device 14. . As a result, the screen image in the original standby state is displayed on the image display device 14. Then, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa ends the menu control process.

  In step S2212-20, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the “volume adjustment screen” is being displayed on the image display device 14, and if it is determined that the display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2212-21. If it is determined that the image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2212-22.

  In step S2211-21, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs a volume adjustment control process and ends the menu control process. Details of the processing in step S2212-21 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S2212-22, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the “light quantity adjustment screen” is being displayed on the image display device 14, and if it is determined that it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2212-23. If it is determined that the menu is not being displayed, the menu control process is terminated.

  In step S2412-23, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs a light amount adjustment control process and ends the menu control process. Details of the processing in step S2212-23 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment control process of step S2212-1 of FIG.

  In Step S2212-141, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the operation of the player who has determined that the operation has been performed in Step S2201 of FIG. 51 is an operation of the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A. If it is determined that the operation is for the section 194A, the process proceeds to step S2212-142, and if it is determined that the operation is not for the right section 194A, the process proceeds to step S2212-145.

  In step S2212-142, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa confirms the currently designated volume level in the volume level setting area, and whether the upper limit “5” is currently designated as the player-side volume level for adjustment. If it is determined that the upper limit “5” is not specified, the process proceeds to steps S2212-1143, and if it is determined that the upper limit “5” is specified. Then, the volume adjustment control process ends.

  In Steps S2212-143, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a volume level designation command that designates a volume level one level higher than the currently designated volume level, and transmits the volume level designation command to the VDP 105Ba.

  When receiving the volume level designation command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba sets the volume level based on the received volume level designation command as the volume level setting value in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105e.

  In step S2212-144, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the image information of the notification image of the volume (designated volume) designated in step S2212-143 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab in the image information setting of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. By setting the area, the notification image is designated, and the volume adjustment control process ends.

  In step S2212-145, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the player's operation determined to have been operated in step S2201 of FIG. 51 is an operation of the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A. When it is determined that the operation is for the unit 192A, the process proceeds to steps S2212-146, and when it is determined that the operation is not for the left unit 192A, the volume adjustment control process is terminated.

  In step S2212-146, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa confirms the currently designated volume level in the volume level setting area, and the lower limit “0” (mute) is currently designated as the volume level for player side adjustment. If it is determined that “0” (mute) is not specified, the process proceeds to step S2212-147, and it is determined that “0” (mute) is specified. In this case, the volume adjustment control process ends.

  In Steps S2212-147, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a volume level designation command that designates a volume level one level lower than the currently designated volume level for adjustment on the player side, and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba.

  When receiving the volume level designation command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba sets the volume level based on the received volume level designation command as the volume level setting value in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105e.

  In step S2212-148, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the image information of the notification image of the volume (designated volume) designated in step S2212-147 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab in the image information setting of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. By setting the area, the notification image is designated, and the volume adjustment control process ends.

  In step S2400, a display list is generated and output for displaying the image specified by the processing in steps S2212 to 144. In step S2400, the VDP 105Ba performs a drawing process based on the display list. When the volume level “1” is designated, a volume adjustment screen in which the volume gauge of FIG. 93A indicates “1” is displayed. When the volume level “2” is designated, FIG. When the volume adjustment screen in which the volume gauge in (b) indicates “2” is displayed and the volume level “3” is designated, the volume adjustment screen in which the volume gauge in FIG. 93 (c) indicates “3” is displayed. When the volume level “4” is designated, a volume adjustment screen in which the volume gauge of FIG. 93 (d) indicates “4” is displayed. When the volume level “5” is designated, FIG. Volume gauge of (e) to display the volume control screen that shows a "5".

  As will be described later, when the volume gauge “1” in FIG. 93A is displayed, “volume 1 notification sound” (do) (sound number: S4-1) is output, and FIG. 93B is displayed. When the volume gauge “2” is displayed, “volume 2 notification sound” (re) (sound number: S4-2) is output, and when the volume gauge “3” of FIG. When “notification sound” (mi) (sound number: S4-3) is output and the volume gauge “4” in FIG. 93 (d) is displayed, “sound volume 4 notification sound” (fa) (sound number: S4-4) ) And the volume gauge “5” in FIG. 93 (e) is displayed, the “volume 5 notification sound” (G) (sound number: S4-5) is output.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the light amount adjustment control processing in step S2212-23 of FIG.

  In step S2212-171, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the operation of the player who has determined that the operation has been performed in step S2201 of FIG. 51 is an operation of the right portion 194A of the second effect button 19A. If it is determined that the operation is for the section 194A, the process proceeds to steps S2212-172, and if it is determined that the operation is not for the right section 194A, the process proceeds to steps S2212-1175.

  In step S2212-172, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa checks the currently designated light amount level in the light amount level setting area, determines whether or not the upper limit value “5” is currently designated as the light amount level, and If it is determined that the upper limit “5” is not specified, the process proceeds to steps S2212-173, and if it is determined that the upper limit “5” is specified, the light amount adjustment control process is performed. Exit.

In Steps S2212-173, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a light amount level designation command that designates a light amount level that is one step higher than the currently designated light amount level, and uses the effect control board 102 and the lamp control board 104 for effects. Transmit to the lighting device 16.
When receiving the light level specification command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the effect lighting device 16 performs a process of setting the light amount specified by the volume level specification command.

  In step S2212-174, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the image information of the notification image of the light amount (specified light amount) designated in steps S2212-173 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab in the image information setting of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. By setting the area, the notification image is designated, and the light amount adjustment control process is terminated.

  In Step S2212-175, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the operation of the player who has determined that the operation has been performed in Step S2201 of FIG. 51 is an operation of the left portion 192A of the second effect button 19A. When it is determined that the operation is for the unit 192A, the process proceeds to steps S2212-176, and when it is determined that the operation is not for the left unit 192A, the light amount adjustment control process is terminated.

  In step S2212-176, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa checks the currently designated light amount level in the light amount level setting area, determines whether or not the lower limit value “1” is currently designated as the light amount level, and If it is determined that the lower limit “1” is not specified, the process proceeds to steps S2212-1177, and if it is determined that the lower limit “1” is specified, the light amount adjustment control process is performed. Exit.

In step S2212-177, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a light amount level designation command that designates a light amount level that is one step lower than the currently designated light amount level, and uses the effect control board 102 and the lamp control board 104 for effects. Transmit to the lighting device 16.
When receiving the light level specification command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the effect lighting device 16 performs a process of setting the light amount specified by the volume level specification command.

  In step S2212-178, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets the image information of the notification image of the light amount (specified light amount) designated in step S2212-1177 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab in the image information setting of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. By setting the area, the notification image is designated, and the light amount adjustment control process is terminated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the image designation process in step S2300 of FIG.
In step S2301, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the variable effect control command is received from the effect control board 102 by determining whether or not the variable effect control command is stored in the reception buffer of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. If it is determined that it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it is determined that it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2303.

  In step S2302, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays in advance on the image display device 14 in the variation effect of the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect control command received in step S2301 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Is set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, thereby designating the effect image.

  In the effect mode A (AX, AY, or AZ) in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa changes the effect mode pattern AX for the effect mode AX associated with each other in this step S2302, and the effect mode AY. The change effect image for the change effect pattern for the effect mode and the change effect pattern for the effect mode AZ is designated.

In step S2400 described above, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs display list generation / output processing in which the rendering control contents of the designated effect modes AX, AY, and AZ are designated in step S2400. In VDP 105Ba, the effect mode The drawing processing of the AX, AY, and AZ variation effect images is performed simultaneously. However, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa transmits to the VDP 105Ba effect mode designation information for designating the currently set effect mode among the effect modes AX to AZ. Based on the effect mode designation information received from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba causes the image display device 14 to output only the image data of the fluctuating effect image of the effect mode currently set from the “drawing frame buffer”. Thereby, the change effect image of the effect mode currently set is displayed on the image display device 14.
In addition, the process which displays the fluctuation effect image of the effect mode currently set among effect mode AX-AZ is not limited to this, For example, liquid crystal control CPU105Aa is currently setting among effect modes AX-AZ. A display list designating only the rendering control content of the fluctuating effect image in the effect mode may be generated and output.

  In step S2303, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the hold effect control command is received from the effect control board 102 by determining whether or not the hold effect control command is stored in the reception buffer of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. If it is determined that it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2304. If it is determined that it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2305.

  In step S2304, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the control content of the hold effect specified by the hold effect control command received in step S2303 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. The reserved image is designated by setting the image information of the reserved image in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2305, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the opening effect control command is received from the effect control board 102 by determining whether or not the opening effect control command is stored in the reception buffer of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. If it is determined that it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2306. If it is determined that it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2306, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays an effect image (opening effect image) displayed on the image display device 14 in the opening effect based on the opening effect control command received in step S2305 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Is set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac to designate the opening effect image.

  In step S2307, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the round effect control command is received from the effect control board 102 by determining whether or not the round effect control command is stored in the reception buffer of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. If it is determined that it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2308. If it is determined that it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  In step S2308, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays an effect image (round effect image) displayed on the image display device 14 in the round effect based on the round effect control command received in step S2307 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Is set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac to designate a round effect image.

  In step S2309, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the ending effect control command is received from the effect control board 102 by determining whether or not the ending effect control command is stored in the reception buffer of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. If it is determined that it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2310. If it is determined that it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2311.

  In step S2310, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays an effect image (ending effect image) displayed on the image display device 14 in the ending effect based on the ending effect control command received in step S2309 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Is set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac to designate an ending effect image.

  In step S2311, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether the demonstration effect control command is received from the effect control board 102 by determining whether the demonstration effect control command is stored in the reception buffer of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. If it is determined that it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2312, and if it is determined that it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2313.

  In step S2312, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays an effect image (demonstration effect image) displayed on the image display device 14 in the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect control command received in step S2311, among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Is set in the image information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac to designate a demonstration effect image.

  In step S2313, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa receives the error designation command from the main control board 101 via the effect control board 102 by determining whether or not the error designation command is stored in the reception buffer of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. If it is determined that the image has been received, the process proceeds to step S2314. If it is determined that the image has not been received, the image designation process ends.

  In step S2314, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays an error notification image for notifying an error in the image display device 14 specified by the error specification command received in step S2313 among the images stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. By setting in the image information setting area of the control RAM 105Ac, an error notification image is designated, and the image designation process is terminated.

Here, when a plurality of types of errors are occurring at the same time, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates error notification images of all types of errors.
Alternatively, the number of error notification images that can be displayed simultaneously on the image display device 14 is set to “3”, and even when four types of errors are occurring at the same time, error notification images of three types of errors having a high priority among them are displayed. You may make it designate. The number of error notification images that can be displayed simultaneously on the image display device 14 is not limited to this.
Regarding the error notification sound to be described later, only the error notification sound having the highest priority is specified even when a plurality of types of errors are occurring. In this way, when multiple types of errors occur, the number of error notification images displayed on the image display device 14 and the number of error notification sounds output from the sound output device 15 become different. .

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the sound designation process in step S2500 of FIG.
In step S2501, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not a variable effect image is designated by the process in step S2302 of FIG. 58. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S2503.

  In step S2502, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab, based on the control contents of the changing effect specified by the changing effect control command received in step S2301 of FIG. , The sound information of the sound (the effect sound for variation effect) to be reproduced when displaying the variation effect image designated in the process of step S2302 is displayed on the image display device 14, and the information (sound designation information) indicating the designation. Is set in the sound designation information setting area for setting the sound designation information in the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In the effect mode A (AX, AY, or AZ) in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa changes the effect mode pattern AX for the effect mode AX and the effect mode AY associated with each other in this step S2502. The effect sound for change effect of the change effect pattern for change effect pattern for effect mode AZ is designated.

  For example, in step S2502, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the variation effect effect sounds of “variation effect pattern AX021”, “variation effect pattern AY021”, and “variation effect pattern AZ021” associated with each other in FIG. 76 (a). “Production mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z), “Production mode AX normal reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM-AX-N2), “Production mode AX super reach BGM ( (Sound number: BGM-AX-P2) ”,“ effect mode AY symbol variation BGM ”(sound number: BGM-AY-Z),“ effect mode AY normal reach BGM (continuation / hit) ”in FIG. (Sound Number: BGM-AY-N2), “Direction Mode AY Super Reach BGM (Continue / Win) (Sound number: BGM-AY-P2), “Production mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (Sound number: BGM-AZ-Z), “Production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / win)” in FIG. No .: BGM-AZ-N2), “Production Mode AZ Super Reach BGM (Continue / Hit)” (Sound Number: BGM-AZ-P2), “Symbol Fluctuation Sound” in FIG. 77A (Sound Number: HZ) , “Design definite sound” (sound number: KZ) is designated.

  For example, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern AX021”, “variation effect pattern AY021”, and “variation effect pattern AZ021”, BGM is changed to “zone” before becoming “normal reach”. When the zone effect to be changed to “BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) is started, “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z), “rendering mode AY symbol variation” "BGM" (sound number: BGM-AY-Z), "Direction mode AZ design variation BGM" (sound number: BGM-AX-Z), "rush sound" (sound number: TA), "zone BGM (L)" (Sound number: BGM-L), “symbol fluctuating sound” (sound number: HZ), “symbol definitive sound” (sound number: KZ) are designated, and BGM for “normal reach” is not designated.

  In step S2503, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not a reserved image is designated by the process in step S2304 in FIG. 58. If it is determined that the reserved image is designated, the process proceeds to step S2504, and the designated image is designated. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S2505.

  In step S2504, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates a sound (start winning prize sound) to be reproduced when displaying the reserved image at the start winning prize designated in the process of step S2304 on the image display device 14, and the sound designation information is displayed. It is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  For example, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “start winning sound 1” (sound number: SN1) if the color of the reserved image at the time of winning the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is “white”, If it is “green” or “red”, “second start winning sound 2” (sound number: SN2) is designated.

  In step S2505, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the opening effect image is designated by the processing in step S2306 in FIG. 58. If it is determined that the opening effect image is designated, the process proceeds to step S2506 and is designated. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S2507.

  In step S2506, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa plays the sound that is reproduced when the opening effect image designated in the process of step S2306 is displayed on the image display device 14 among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. The sound information of (opening effect sound) is designated, and information (sound designation information) indicating that designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2507, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not a round effect image is designated by the process in step S2308 of FIG. 58. If it is determined that the round effect image is designated, the process proceeds to step S2508 and is designated. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S2509.

  In step S2508, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa plays a sound to be reproduced when the round effect image designated in the process of step S2308 is displayed on the image display device 14 among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Sound information of (round effect sound) is designated, and information (sound designation information) indicating that designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2509, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not an ending effect image is designated by the process in step S2310 of FIG. 58. If it is determined that the ending effect image is designated, the process proceeds to step S2510 and is designated. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S2511.

  In step S2510, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa plays the sound that is reproduced when the ending effect image designated in the process of step S2310 is displayed on the image display device 14 among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. The sound information of (ending effect sound) is designated, and the information (sound designation information) indicating the designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2511, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not a demonstration effect image is designated by the process in step S2312 of FIG. 58. If it is determined that the demonstration effect image is designated, the process proceeds to step S2512 and is designated. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S2515.

  In step S2512, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa plays the sound to be reproduced when displaying the demonstration effect image designated in the process of step S2312, among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. The sound information of (demonstration effect sound) is designated, information (sound designation information) indicating the designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, and the sound designation process is terminated.

  As a process following step S2512 in FIG. 59, in step S2515 in FIG. 60, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not an image having meter values 1 to 15 has been designated by the process in FIG. If it is determined that it has been determined, the process proceeds to step S2516. If it is determined that it has not been designated, the process proceeds to step S2517.

  In step S <b> 2516, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa plays the operation sound to be reproduced when displaying the image with the specified meter value 1 to 15 among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105 </ b> Ab on the image display device 14. The sound information of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) is designated, and the information (sound designation information) indicating the designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2517, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not an image with a meter value of 0 is designated by the process of FIG. 53A. If it is determined that the image is designated, the process proceeds to step S2518. If it is determined that it has not been designated, the process proceeds to step S2519.

  In step S2518, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa uses the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab as an operation sound to be reproduced when displaying the image with the designated meter value 0 on the image display device 14. The sound information of “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) is designated, and information (sound designation information) indicating the designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2519, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not a successful effect image has been designated by the processing in step S2206-3 in FIG. 53B, and if it is determined that it has been designated, the process proceeds to step S2520. If the process is shifted and it is determined that it is not designated, the process shifts to step S2521.

  In step S2520, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa produces an effect sound as an effect sound to be reproduced when displaying the image of the designated successful effect on the image display device 14 among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Depending on the mode, “development notice AX1-compatible effect sound (success effect)” (sound number: HAX1), “development notice AX1-compatible effect sound (success effect)” (sound number: HAY1), “development notice AZ1-compatible effect sound” (Success effect) "(sound number: HAZ1) of the sound information of the corresponding sound is designated, and information (sound designation information) of the designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2521, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not a failure effect image has been designated by the processing in step S2206-6 of FIG. 53B, and if it is determined that it has been designated, the process proceeds to step S2522. If the process is shifted and it is determined that it is not designated, the process shifts to step S2523.

  In step S2522, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa produces an effect sound as an effect sound to be reproduced when displaying the image of the designated failure effect on the image display device 14 among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. Depending on the mode, “development notice AX2-compatible effect sound (failure effect)” (sound number: HAX2), “development notice AY2-compatible effect sound (failure effect)” (sound number: HAY2), “development notice AZ2-compatible effect sound” (Success effect) ”(sound number: HAZ2) is designated as sound information of the corresponding sound, and information (sound designation information) indicating that designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  Here, an example of the effect of the advance notice will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a) to 91 (g), when the “evolution advance notice AX1” is executed in the variation production of the “variation production pattern AX021” developed from “normal reach AX1-1” to “super reach AX1-1”. The flow is shown. Further, in FIGS. 91A to 91C and FIGS. 91H to 91K, “Development notice AX1” in the variation effect of “Fluctuation effect pattern AX007” that does not develop from “Normal reach AX1-1” to the next reach effect. This shows the flow of performance when performing.

  In the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), after “normal reach” is started, when the operation effective period of the first effect button 18A in “development notice” is started, FIG. 91 (b) As shown in FIG. 4, a gauge image having meter values 1 to 15 is displayed, a character image “Defeat the enemy in time!”, And “5 seconds indicating that the operation valid period is 5 seconds” And an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the first effect button 18A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), the first effect button 18A was repeatedly hit (operated twice or more) with the remaining operation period remaining in the range of 4 seconds, and the gauge meter value decreased to 10 in the image display device 14. And When operating each first effect button 18 </ b> A for continuous hitting, “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) (picone) is output from the sound output device 15 as an operation sound.

  Thereafter, in the “evolution notice AX1” during the variation production of the “variation production pattern AX021” developed from the “normal reach AX1-1” to the “super reach AX1-1”, as shown in FIG. Assume that the gauge value of the gauge has decreased to 2 because the first effect button 18A is repeatedly hit from the remaining 4 seconds to the 1 second. At the time of continuous hitting, “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) (picone) is output from the sound output device 15 as the operation sound of the first effect button 18A.

  After the operation effective period is less than 1 second (0 second range) after this FIG. 91 (d), the first effect button 18A is operated once, as shown in FIG. 91 (e). The meter value of the image becomes zero. As the operation sound of the first effect button 18A at the time of this operation, “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) (Khan) is output from the sound output device 15.

  Then, as a corresponding effect of “development notice AX1”, a character image “successful!” As shown in FIG. 91F is displayed on the image display device 14, and a voice “successful” (“ The development sound corresponding to the advance notice AX1 ”(sound number: HAX1)) is output from the sound output device 15. After “development notice AX1”, the image display device 14 displays an effect image informing that the development will be “super reach”, as shown in FIG. 91 (g).

  On the other hand, in the “evolution notice AX2” during the variation production of the “variation production pattern AX007” that does not develop from “normal reach AX1-1” to “super reach AX1-1”, as shown in FIG. 91 (h), the operation valid period Assume that the meter value of the gauge has decreased to 1 because the first effect button 18A is repeatedly hit from the remaining 4 seconds to the 1 second. At the time of continuous hitting, “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) (picone) is output from the sound output device 15 as the operation sound of the first effect button 18A.

  After that, in this “Development Advance Notice AX2”, even if the first effect button 18A is operated once when the operation valid period is less than 1 second (in the range of 0 seconds), as shown in FIG. The meter value of the image does not decrease from 1. Further, “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) (picone) is output from the sound output device 15 as the operation sound of the first effect button 18A at the time of this operation.

  Then, as a corresponding effect of “Development notice AX2”, a character image “failure!” As shown in FIG. 91 (j) is displayed on the image display device 14 and a voice of “failure” (“ The development sound corresponding to the advance notice AX2 ”(sound number: HAX2)) is output from the sound output device 15. After “Development Notice AX1”, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), in the image display device 14, the middle symbol of the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed without matching the numerical values of the right symbol and the left symbol, It will be notified that it will not be developed into “Super Reach” but will be “Lost”.

  In addition, instead of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) (picone), the timing at which “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) (Kern) is output is referred to as “development notice AX1”. ”,“ Development notice AY1 ”,“ Development notice AZ1 ”, and the remaining effective operation period is less than 1 second and the gauge meter value is set to 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. 91 (b) The operation sound when displaying a meter value (white) greater than 3 shown in FIG. 5 is “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) (picone), and the meter value is 3 or less (gray) The operation sound at the time of displaying may be “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) (Khan).

  In step S2523, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not an image at the time of the speech warning operation is designated by the process in step S2208 of FIG. 51. If it is determined that the image is designated, the process proceeds to step S2524. If it is determined that it has not been designated, the process proceeds to step S2525.

  In step S <b> 2524, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa reproduces the operation sound to be reproduced when displaying the image at the time of the designated speech advance notice operation on the image display device 14 among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105 </ b> Ab. The sound information of “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1) is designated, and the information (sound designation information) indicating the designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2525, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the image of the corresponding effect of the speech advance notice is specified by the process of step S2208 in FIG. 51. If it is determined that the image is specified, the process proceeds to step S2526. If it is determined that it has not been designated, the process proceeds to step S2527.

  In step S <b> 2526, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa produces the effect sound that is reproduced when displaying the image of the effect corresponding to the designated speech advance notice among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105 </ b> Ab. In accordance with the production mode, the corresponding sound information is designated from the “line announcement sound corresponding to the SX1 notice” (sound number: HAX1) to the “production sound corresponding to the line notice AX3” (sound number: RAX3), Information indicating the designation (sound designation information) is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2527, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not an image at the time of operating the determined effect is specified by the process of step S2210-2 in FIG. 54. If it is determined that the image is specified, the process proceeds to step S2528. If the process is shifted and it is determined that it is not designated, the process shifts to step S2529.

  In step S2528, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa reproduces the operation sound to be reproduced when displaying the image at the time of the designated decision operation among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab on the image display device 14. The sound information of “operation sound 3” (sound number: S3) is designated, and the information (sound designation information) indicating the designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2529, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not an image corresponding to the determined effect (for big hit) is specified by the process in step S2210-6 of FIG. 54, and if it is determined that the image is specified. Moves the process to step S2530, and moves the process to step S2532 if it is determined that it is not designated.

  In step S2530, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa reproduces the effect sound that is reproduced when displaying the image of the effect corresponding to the designated effect of the designated information among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. In accordance with the production mode, “decided production AX (winning) corresponding production sound” (sound number: KAXa), “decided production AY (winning) correspondence production sound” (sound number: KAYa), “decided production AZ (winning) The sound information of the corresponding sound of “) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAZa) is designated, and information (sound designation information) indicating that designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2531, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa selects “effect mode AX special reach BGM (second half, hit)” (sound number: BGM) according to the effect mode among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. -AX-Q2), "Direction Mode AY Special Reach BGM (Second Half, Win)" (Sound Number: BGM-AY-Q2), "Direction Mode AZ Special Reach BGM (Second Half, Win)" (Sound Number: BGM-AZ) The sound information of the corresponding BGM in -Q2) is designated, and information (sound designation information) indicating that designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2532, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not an image corresponding to the determined effect (for loss) is designated by the process of step S2210-7 in FIG. 54, and if it is determined that the image is designated. Moves the process to step S2533, and moves the process to step S2535 if it is determined that it is not designated.

  In step S2533, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa reproduces the effect sound to be reproduced when displaying the image of the effect corresponding to the designated fixed effect among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. In accordance with the production mode, “determination effect AX (losing) corresponding production sound” (sound number: KAXb), “determination production AY (losing) production effect sound” (sound number: KAYb), “determination production AZ (losing) The sound information of the corresponding sound of “) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: KAZb) is designated, and information (sound designation information) indicating that designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2534, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa selects “production mode AX special reach BGM (second half, loss)” (sound number: BGM) according to the production mode among the sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. -AX-Q3), "Direction Mode AY Special Reach BGM (Last Half, Loss)" (Sound Number: BGM-AY-Q3), "Direction Mode AZ Special Reach BGM (Second Half, Loss)" (Sound Number: BGM-AZ) The sound information of the corresponding BGM in -Q3) is designated, and information (sound designation information) indicating that designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac.

  In step S2535, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not a notification image of the designated volume is designated by the processing of step S2212 to 144 or step S2212 to 148 in FIG. 56. The process moves to step S2536, and if it is determined that it is not designated, the sound designation process is terminated.

  In step S2536, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa uses “sound information stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab as sound information at the time of volume adjustment to be reproduced when displaying the designated notification image on the image display device 14. "Volume 1 notification sound (Do)" (Sound number: S4-1), "Volume 2 notification sound (Re)" (Sound number: S4-2), "Volume 3 notification sound (Mi)" (Sound number: S4- 3) Specify the sound information of the corresponding sound among “Volume 4 notification sound (F)” (sound number: S4-4) and “Volume 5 notification sound (So)” (sound number: S4-5). Then, the information (sound designation information) indicating the designation is set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac, and the sound designation process is terminated.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the sound reproduction control process in step S2600 of FIG.
In step S2601, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa has designated the sound information of the production sound by the sound designation processing of FIG. 59 (whether the sound designation information of the production sound has been set in the sound designation information setting area of the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac). If it is determined that the sound information of the effect sound has been specified, the process proceeds to step S2602, and if it is determined that the sound information of the effect sound has not been specified, the process proceeds to step S2607. Move processing.

  In step S2602, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa specifies the current time based on the sound information determined to have been designated in step S2601, based on the current elapsed time of the effect timed by the timer counter set in the liquid crystal control RAM 105Ac. It is determined whether or not it is the playback start timing of the sound data. If it is determined that it is the playback start timing, the process proceeds to step S2603. If it is determined that it is not the playback start timing, the sound playback control process is performed. Exit.

In step S2603, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether the sound data of the effect sound to be reproduced is “stereo data” using “pair ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be as “reproduction ch” for reproducing the sound data. It is determined whether or not “monaural data” using one channel of “pair ch” as “reproduction ch”.
In this step S2603, if the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that the sound data of the effect sound to be reproduced is “stereo data”, the process proceeds to step S2604, and if it is determined to be “monaural data”. The process moves to step S2605.

  In step S2604, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs stereo data channel designation processing. The processing in step S2604 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S2604-1 shown in FIG. 62A, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether there is a “pair ch” as “reproduction ch” during reproduction of stereo data having the same “sound number” as the stereo data to be reproduced. Determine whether. In step S2604-1, if the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that there is a “pair ch” in which stereo data having the same “sound number” as that of the stereo data to be reproduced is being reproduced, the process proceeds to step S2604-2. If it is determined that there is no transfer, the process proceeds to step S2604-3.

  In step S2604-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines the “pair ch” in which the stereo data having the same “sound number” as the reproduction of the stereo data determined in step S2604-1 is being reproduced, and the stereo data to be reproduced from now on. The “reproduction channel” to be stored is designated, and the stereo data channel designation processing is terminated.

  In step S2604-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets “pair ch” for reproducing stereo data after “ch4” except “ch0” to “ch3” dedicated to error notification sounds in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. It is determined whether or not there is a “pair ch” in which sound data is not stored (this is referred to as “empty pair ch”). If it is determined that there is, the process moves to step S2604-4; If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S2604-5.

  In step S2604-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa selects the “empty pair ch” having the smallest (highest) “pair ch” number among the “vacant pair ch” determined in step S2604-3. The “reproduction ch” for storing data is designated, and the stereo data channel designation processing is terminated.

  In step S2604-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch” in which the stereo data with the lowest priority is being reproduced in the sound reproduction area as “reproduction ch” for storing the stereo data to be reproduced in the future. Then, the stereo data channel designation process is terminated.

  In step S2605, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs monaural data channel designation processing. The processing in step S2605 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S2605-1 shown in FIG. 62 (b), if the monaural data to be reproduced is monaural data of an error notification sound, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa uses a channel dedicated to the error notification sound ("ch0" to "ch3"). Since any one of them is associated and it is not necessary to perform the monaural data channel designation process, it is determined whether or not the data to be reproduced is monaural data of an error notification sound. In step S2605-1, if the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines to reproduce the monaural data of the error notification sound, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa ends the monaural data channel designation processing, and the monaural data to be reproduced is monaural data other than the error notification sound. If it is determined that, the process proceeds to step S2605-2.

  In step S2605-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether there is a “reproduction ch” in which monaural data having the same “sound number” or “group number” as the monaural data to be reproduced is being reproduced. In step S2605-2, if the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that there is “reproduction ch” in which monaural data having the same “sound number” or “group number” as the monaural data to be reproduced is being reproduced, step S2605 is performed. If it is determined that the process is not performed and the process is not performed, the process proceeds to step S2605-4.

  In step S2605-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines the “reproduction ch” in which monaural data having the same “sound number” or “group number” as the reproduction of the monaural data determined in step S2605-1 is being reproduced. The “reproduction ch” for storing the monaural data to be reproduced is designated, and the monaural data channel designation process is terminated.

  In step S2605-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not there is one or more one channel (also referred to as “empty ch”) in which sound data is not stored in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. If it is determined that there are one or more “vacant channels”, the process proceeds to step S2605-5, and if it is determined that there is no “vacant ch”, the process proceeds to step S2605-8.

  In step S2605-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not monaural data is being reproduced in one of the “pair ch” channels among the “empty ch” determined in step S2605-4. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step S2605-6, and if it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S2605-7.

  In step S2605-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa has the smallest channel number among the channels determined in step S2605-5 (“empty ch” in which monaural data is being reproduced on one channel of “pair ch”) ( The “topmost” “vacant ch” is designated as “reproduction ch” for storing monaural data to be reproduced from now on, and the monaural data channel designation processing is terminated.

  In step S2605-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa stores the monaural data to be reproduced from the “vacant ch” having the smallest channel number (highest) among the “ch4” to “ch13” in the sound reproduction area. And the monaural data channel designation process is terminated.

  In step S2605-8, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates the channel in which the monaural data having the lowest priority is being reproduced in the sound reproduction area as the “reproduction ch” for storing the monaural data to be reproduced, and the monaural data channel. The specified process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 61, in step S2606, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs effect sound reproduction command generation transmission processing. In step S2606, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa stores and reproduces the sound data (stereo data or monaural data) of the effect sound based on the previously specified sound information in the “reproduction ch” designated in step 2604 or step S2605. A reproduction command to be generated is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba, and the sound reproduction control process is terminated.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives the playback instruction of the effect sound transmitted from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reads the sound data (stereo data or monaural data) specified by the playback instruction from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the playback instruction, and the VRAM 105Be. Is stored in the channel specified as “playback ch” in the sound playback area and is played back, and is set in the volume level setting area at a ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the sound data specified by the playback command. Control is performed to output sound data from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the current volume level.

  Note that the VDP 105Ba determines that sound data (stereo data or monaural data) is stored in a channel designated as “reproduction ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be (YES in step S2604-1 or step S2605). -2), the reproduction is stopped by deleting the stored sound data to stop the output from the sound output device 15, and then the sound data (stereo data or monaural data specified by the reproduction command) ) Is read from the sound data ROM 105Bd, stored in the “reproduction ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and reproduced.

  In step S2607, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not an error notification image has been designated by the processing in step S2314 of FIG. 58. If it is determined that the error notification image has been designated, the process proceeds to step S2608, where If it is determined that it is not, the sound reproduction control process is terminated.

  In step S2608, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the error notification image designated by the process of step S2314 on the image display device 14 based on the sound information of the error notification sound stored in the sound information table of the liquid crystal control ROM 105Ab. A playback command for designating a channel that is stored with the sound data of the error notification sound to be reproduced in the “stop” state as “playback ch” and playing back the monaural data of the error notification sound on the “playback ch” Is transmitted to the VDP 105Ba, and the sound reproduction control process is terminated.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives the error notification sound reproduction command transmitted from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, on the basis of the reproduction command, the VDP 105Ba converts the monaural data of the error notification sound from “stop” to “reproduction” in the channel specified by the reproduction command. ”And the ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the sound designated by the reproduction command is multiplied by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. Control is performed so that the reproduced error notification sound is output from the sound output device 15 at the output volume.

  As described above, when a plurality of types of errors are occurring at the same time, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates error notification images for all types of errors, while for the error notification sound, a plurality of types of errors are occurring. Even in such a case, only the sound data of the error notification sound of the highest priority error is output.

  For example, “abnormal winning error” with the highest priority, “magnetic detection error” with the second highest priority, “door opening error” with the third highest priority, and “bottom pan full error” with the lowest priority. Are all occurring at the same time.

In this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa stores “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1) and “ch1” stored in “ch1” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. “Error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection error)” (sound number: E2), “error notification sound 3 (door opening error)” (sound number: E3), “ch3” stored in “ch2” Outputs only the sound data of “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1), which has the highest priority among the “error notification sound 4 (bottom plate full error)” (sound number: E4) Let
As described above, when a plurality of errors have occurred, the sound data of the error notification sound of the error having the highest priority among the remaining occurring errors is output at the time when the occurring error is resolved. To.

  Further, as described above, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, together with the error notification sound reproduction command, the error notification sound is “error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning error)” (sound number: E1), “error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection). Error) ”(sound number: E2),“ error notification sound 3 (door opening error) ”(sound number: E3), the output volume of the effect sound being output is set to 0% (mute). If the error notification sound is “error notification sound 4 (bottom plate full error)” (sound number: E4), the mute instruction is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba. An FO command for instructing to be generated is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  Based on the reproduction command, the VDP 105Ba sets the monaural data of the error notification sound to the “reproduced” state in the channel for reproducing the error notification sound.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa receives the error notification cancellation designation command from the main control board 101, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa stops the reproduction of the error notification sound designated to be released by the error notification cancellation designation command. A designated stop command is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stops the reproduction of the monaural data of the error notification sound in the channel of the error notification sound that stops the reproduction based on the stop command.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, together with this error notification sound stop command, performs FI to return the output volume of the production sound from the current volume (0% (mute (mute)) or reduced volume) to the original output volume. An instruction is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the symbol variation effect sound volume change control processing of step S2700 of FIG.

In step S2701, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the changing effect is currently being executed. If it is determined that the changing effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2702, and the changing effect is being executed. If it is determined that it is not, the symbol variation effect sound volume change control process is terminated.
At the beginning of the fluctuation, the BGM sound data of any of the effect mode AX, effect mode AY, and effect mode AZ is reproduced, but the sound data of the effect mode BGM not selected by the player is as follows. The sound data of the BGM in the production mode that is played back with the mute process described below and selected by the player is output so that the output volume gradually increases by the FI process described below.

  In addition, the sound data of the production sound of any of the production modes AX, the production mode AY, and the production mode AZ is reproduced at the reproduction timing, but is not related to the following FI processing and FO processing. The sound data of the effect sound of “No additional operation” is reproduced with the mute processing described below, and the sound data of the effect sound of “No additional operation” in the effect mode selected by the player is By the FI processing, the output volume is gradually raised from 0% (mute) to the FI execution time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the sound is output. The sound data of the effect sound of “effect” is gradually reduced from the current output sound volume over the FO execution time by the FO process to become 0% (muted (silence)).

  In step S2702, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines whether or not the effect mode AX, the effect mode AY, and the effect mode AZ are changed by updating the count value C of the effect mode A loop counter, and the effect mode is changed. If it is determined that the effect mode has been changed, the process proceeds to step S2703. If it is determined that the effect mode has not been changed, the symbol variation effect sound volume change control process ends.

  In step S2703, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates a channel for reproducing the “effect sound dedicated to the effect mode” of the effect mode selected by the player in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. Then, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates the FI execution time and the output volume at the end of the FI of the “production sound dedicated to the production mode” to be played back on the designated channel, and changes the production mode of the production mode selected by the player. An FI command for instructing that the output volume of the “production sound dedicated to the effect mode” is made FI is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  With this FI command, the output volume of the “production sound dedicated to the production mode” is set to an output volume (mute) of 0% at the present time, and each sound data of the “production sound dedicated to the production mode” is terminated at the end of the FI. The output volume (100% output volume) is obtained by multiplying the ratio (%) according to the basic volume by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. An instruction is given to gradually increase the FI execution time until the end (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  Examples of the “production sound dedicated to the production mode” include the production sound of the above-mentioned “additional production without operation” dedicated to the production mode, in addition to “BGM” dedicated to the production mode.

  The “effect sound dedicated to the effect mode” is made up of different stereo data such as “BGM” and “effect addition without operation”, and is stored in different “pair ch”. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa stores “pair ch” in which stereo data of “BGM” in the selected effect mode is stored, and stereo data of “additional effect sound without operation” in the selected effect mode. An FI command is generated by designating each “pair ch”.

When the VDP 105Ba receives the FI command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the “pair” storing the stereo data of “BGM” of the selected effect mode in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be is stored in the FI information having the command content of this FI command. ch ”and the“ Pair ch ”fade information storage area in which the stereo data of“ No operation additional effect sound ”of the selected effect mode is stored, these“ BGM ”,“ No operation additional effect sound ” FI process for gradually increasing the output volume of "."
As a result, the “effect sound dedicated to the effect mode” in the effect mode selected by the player gradually increases from the current 0% magnitude (mute) to the output volume at the end of the FI.

  In step S2704, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates a channel in which the sound data of the “effect sound dedicated to the effect mode” being output from the sound output device 15 in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be is designated. The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates the FO execution time and the output volume at the end of the execution of the sound data of the “production sound dedicated to the production mode” reproduced on the designated channel, and the “production mode dedicated to the production mode” is designated. FO command for instructing to FO the output sound volume of “no effect sound” is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  In this FO command, the output volume of the “production sound dedicated to the production mode” in the production mode to be ended is set to a ratio (%) according to the basic volume of each sound data of the “production sound dedicated to the production mode” at the present time. The output volume (100% output volume) is multiplied by the current volume level master volume set in the volume level setting area, and the output volume is 0% (muted) at the end of the FO ), And instructing to gradually reduce the FO execution time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the present time to the end of the FO.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays “pair ch” in which stereo data of “BGM” in the effect mode to be ended is stored, and “pair ch” in which stereo data of “non-operation additional effect sound” in the effect mode to be ended is stored. Are specified to generate an FO instruction.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives the FO command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the “pair channel” stores stereo data of the effect mode “BGM” in which the FO information having the command content of the FO command is terminated in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. "And the stereo data of" additional effect sound without operation "of the effect mode to be ended are stored in the fade information storage area of" pair ch "where the" BGM "and" additional effect sound without operation "are stored. FO processing for gradually decreasing the output volume is performed.

  In step S2705, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, “pair ch” in which the stereo data “BGM” of the effect mode to be ended, FO in step S2704, is stored, and the effect mode to be ended. “Pair ch” in which stereo data of “No additional operation sound” is stored is generated, and a mute command for instructing “0 (mute)” from the end of the FO is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba. . Thereafter, the symbol variation effect sound volume change control process is terminated.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives a mute command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the mute information having the mute command is displayed in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. Store in the storage area and mute the sound data of “effect sound dedicated to effect mode” in effect modes other than the selected effect mode.

  It should be noted that the volume of all effect sounds is output by the process of the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and the process of the VDP 105Ba based on the instruction of the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, other than when the effect sound is changed based on the change of the effect mode. Is started gradually by such FI processing, and when the output is terminated, it is gradually lowered by such FO processing.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing volume level setting processing in the VDP 105Ba.
In step S4001, the VDP 105Ba determines whether or not a volume level initial value designation command has been received from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa. If it is determined that a volume level initial value designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4002. If it is determined that the volume level initial value designation command has not been received, the volume level setting process is terminated.

  In step S4002, the VDP 105Ba sets a volume level initial value indicated by the received volume level initial value designation command as a master volume in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be as a volume level setting value.

  In step S4003, the VDP 105Ba determines whether or not a volume level designation command has been received from the liquid crystal control CPU 105A based on a player's change operation. If the process moves to S4004 and it is determined that the volume level designation command has not been received, the volume level setting process ends.

  In step S4004, the VDP 105Ba resets the volume level setting value set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be to the volume level change value based on the received volume level designation command, and ends the output volume setting process.

  The VDP 105Ba may set a dedicated volume level “6” for the error notification sound in the volume level setting area. In this case, “96 dB” larger than “90 dB” described above may be set as the master volume value of the volume level “6”.

  Alternatively, for “error notification sound 1” to “error notification sound 3”, an output volume larger than the maximum output volume that can be output when the effect sound is output is set in advance, and the sound is output at the output volume. You may make it output from the apparatus 15. FIG.

  FIG. 65 shows the temporal effects of the variation effect that is executed when the “variation effect pattern AX021” in the effect mode AX, the “variation effect pattern AY021” in the effect mode AY, and the “variation effect pattern AZ021” in the effect mode AZ are determined. It is a figure for demonstrating a flow.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing a variable effect from timing T11 to timing T21.

The sub CPU 102a executes an effect in the effect mode selected from “symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AY1-1”, and “symbol variation AZ1-1” in the period from timing T11 to timing T18. The production control is performed.
Then, the sub CPU 102a executes effects in the effect mode selected from “normal reach AX1-1”, “normal reach AY1-1”, and “normal reach AZ1-1” in the period from the timing T18 to the timing T19, and the timing In the period from T19 to timing T21, effect control is performed to execute the effect in the effect mode selected from “super reach AX1-1”, “super reach AY1-1”, and “super reach AZ1-1”. .

  In the fluctuating effect of “effect mode A”, “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, and “effect mode AZ” are based on the operation of the right part 194A or the left part 192A of the player's second effect button 19A. A “production mode selectable period” that can be changed is set.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the “effect mode selectable period” is one of the special effects symbols in the image display device 14 from the standby state before the timing T11 when the variation effect starts and the timing T12 ( 1st pattern) is set until timing T15 when switching from high speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation. After all the special effect symbols start to change from the timing T11 when the change effect starts (for example, 0.7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change effect (at this point, all the special effect symbols are changing at high speed). ) Until the timing T12 is a “period in which an effect mode cannot be selected” in which the effect modes AX to AZ cannot be selected by the player's operation. Further, after the timing T15, the “effect mode non-selectable period” is reached until the timing T21 when the changing effect ends.

  The example shown in FIG. 65 is an example in which the player selects “effect mode AX” in the standby state before the timing T11 when the variation effect starts, and at the timing T11, “design variation” of the “effect mode AX”. The execution of “AX1-1” is started.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram for describing specific contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect executed in the example shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65, the “effect mode AX” is set based on the player's selection operation before the start of the change effect. Therefore, at the timing T11 when the variation effect starts, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays a plurality of special effects together with the background image of “mountain” in the “effect mode AX” as shown in FIG. Control is performed to display an effect image whose symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  At timing T11, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z), “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z), “effect mode. A reproduction command for each of the “AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  In this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “effect mode AX symbol change BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) as the change effect effect sound. Then, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that there is no reproduction channel of stereo data having the same sound number as the “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) (NO in step S2604-1). In step S2604-3, it is determined that there is an “empty pair ch” (YES in step S2604-3).

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch3” in which the channel number of “pair ch” is the smallest (highest) among the “vacant pair ch” (step S2604-4). Then, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data of “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) with “pair ch3” and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba (step). S2606).

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa also applies to the stereo data of “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) and “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z). Is generated, and a playback command for reproducing stereo data of “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba with “pair ch4”. A reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data of “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is generated and transmitted to VDP 105Ba.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives a stereo data reproduction command of “production mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba receives the “production mode AX” from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command. Stereo data of “symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is read out, stored in “pair ch3” of the sound reproduction area of VRAM 105Be, and reproduced.

  Similarly, when the VDP 105Ba receives a stereo data reproduction command of “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba receives “reproduction command” from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command. Stereo data of effect mode AY symbol variation BGM (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) is read out, stored in “pair ch4” in the sound reproduction area of VRAM 105Be, and reproduced from liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa. When a stereo data playback command of “BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is received, based on this playback command, “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is transmitted from the sound data ROM 105Bd. ) Stereo data is read out and the sound reproduction area “VRAM105Be” It is stored in the A ch5 "to play.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65, the “effect mode AX” is selected and set between the timing T11 and the timing T13. Therefore, the VDP 105Ba has a volume level currently set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be at a ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z). Control is performed so that stereo data of “production mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume.

  On the other hand, at timing T11, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch4” and “pair ch5” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z), “ A mute instruction is generated to instruct to set the output volume of the effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) to “0 (mute)” and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives the mute command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the mute information having the mute command is sent to the “ch6” and “ch7” and “pair ch5” that constitute the “pair ch4” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. Output volume of “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) of “effect mode AY” which is not selected and stored in the mute information storage areas of “ch8” and “ch9” In addition, the output volume of “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) of “effect mode AZ” that is not selected is set to mute (refer to FIG. 86 (a)).

  When the “effect mode AY” is selected at timing T13 shown in FIG. 65 and the effect mode is changed to “effect mode AY” (YES in step S2702), the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the image on the image display device 14. As shown in 94 (b), control is performed to change the background image to “beach” in “effect mode AY”.

  Then, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates and transmits an FI command for causing the output volume of the “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) to FI (step S2703), and “effect mode AX”. The FO command for FO output volume of “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is generated and transmitted (step S2704), and “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number) : BGM-AX-Z) generates and transmits a mute command designating mute from the FO end (step S2705).

Upon receiving the FI command and the FO command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba converts the FI information having the FI command into the FI information of “ch6” and “ch7” constituting the “pair ch4” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. In the storage area, FI processing is performed so that the output volume of the “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) of the “effect mode AY” is increased so as to gradually increase. The FO information having the FO command is stored in the FO information storage areas of “ch4” and “ch5” constituting “pair ch3” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and “effect mode AX symbol variation of“ effect mode AX ”is stored. FO processing for gradually decreasing the output volume of “BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is performed.
Further, when the VDP 105Ba receives the mute command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the mute information having the mute command is sent to the mute information storage areas of “ch4” and “ch5” constituting the “pair ch3” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. And the output volume of “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) of “effect mode AX” is set to mute (silence) after FO.

  Then, the VDP 105Ba causes the output volume of the “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) to FI and then “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z). Is the output volume obtained by multiplying the ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the volume by the master volume value of the volume level currently set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be, and the “production mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number) : BGM-AY-Z) is controlled to output from the sound output device 15.

Further, while the special effect symbol is fluctuating, “symbol fluctuation sound” (sound number: HZ) (FIG. 77 (a)) for 3 seconds is output.
The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “ch10” having the smallest (most significant) channel number among the “vacant ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be at the timing of outputting “symbol fluctuation sound”. A reproduction command for reproducing monaural data of “symbol fluctuation sound” (sound number: HZ) is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.
When the VDP 105Ba receives a reproduction command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reads monaural data of “symbol fluctuation sound” (sound number: HZ) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command, and “ch10” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. Is stored and played, and the ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the “symbol fluctuation sound” (sound number: HZ) is multiplied by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. Control is performed so that the “symbol fluctuation sound” (sound number: HZ) is output from the sound output device 15 at the combined output volume.

  Further, at the timing when “character notice AY1” of “effect mode AY” is executed after timing T13, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the effect image of “character ay1” as an image display device as shown in FIG. 14 is designated, “Pair ch6” which is the “empty pair ch” with the smallest channel number in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be is designated, and “Pair ch6” is “Character notice AY1 effect sound” ”(Sound number: CAY1) is generated and a reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  Further, at the timing when the “character notice AY1” of the “effect mode AZ” is executed, which is the same timing as the execution timing of the “character notice AY1,” the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa is the highest in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. “Pair ch 7”, which is “empty pair ch”, is designated, and a playback command for reproducing the stereo data of “character notice AZ (1) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ1-1) by “pair ch 7” is issued. Generate and send to VDP 105Ba.

  However, since “effect mode AY” is set, “character notice AZ (1) 1” is not executed. For this reason, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch7” at the timing of reproducing “character notice AZ (1) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ1-1), and “character notice AZ (1) 1 effect”. A mute command is sent to the VDP 105Ba to set the volume of the “sound” (sound number: CAZ1-1) to “0 (mute)”.

  When receiving the mute command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba stores the mute information having the mute command in the mute information storage areas of “ch12” and “ch13” constituting the “pair ch7” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. Then, the volume of the “character notice AZ (1) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ1-1) of the “effect mode AZ” not selected is muted (see FIG. 86B).

  After that, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa changes the effect mode to “effect mode AZ” by selecting “effect mode AZ” at timing T14 (YES in step S2702), and the image display device 14 displays FIG. As shown in c), control is performed to change the background image to “town” in “effect mode AZ”.

  Then, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates and transmits an FI command for causing the volume of the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) to FI (step S2703), and the “effect mode AY” A FO command is generated and transmitted to FO the volume of “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) (step S2704), and “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM). -AY-Z) A mute command designating mute from the FO end is generated and transmitted (step S2705).

  The VDP 105Ba is a master volume value of the volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be at a ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the “production mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z). The sound output device 15 is controlled to output “production mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) at an output volume obtained by multiplying the sound output.

  Further, at the execution timing of “character notice AZ (2) 1” after timing T14, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the effect image of “character az (2) 1” as an image display device as shown in FIG. 94 (c). 14 is designated, and “Pair ch6”, which is the highest “vacant pair ch”, is designated in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and “Pear chase AZ (2) 1 effect sound” (“Pair ch6”) ( A reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data of the sound number: CAZ2-1) is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives a reproduction command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reads the stereo of “character notice AZ (2) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ2-1) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command. The volume level of the VRAM 105Be is stored in the “pair ch6” of the sound playback area and played back, and the volume level of the VRAM 105Be is set to a ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the “character notice AZ (2) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ2-1) The sound output device 15 outputs “Character notice AZ (2) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ2-1) at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the volume level set in the setting area. Control.

  In the present embodiment, the reproduced sound data (stereo data or monaural data) is erased from the stored channel (reproduction channel) when the reproduction ends.

  As described above, when the production mode is changed from “production mode AX” to “production mode AY” based on the player's selection operation at timing T13 in “symbol variation AZ1-1”, “production mode AX” In place of the “dedicated effect sound”, the sound data of the effect sound dedicated to “effect mode AY” is output. Thereafter, when the production mode is changed from “production mode AY” to “production mode AZ” based on the player's selection operation at timing T14 in “symbol variation AY1-1”, the “production mode AY” is exclusively used. Instead of the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound dedicated to the “effect mode AZ” is output.

FIG. 66 is a diagram for describing a temporal flow of the effect sound changing process when the effect mode is changed in the example of FIG. 65.
As shown in FIG. 66 (1), the “effect mode selectable period” is the standby state before the timing T101 (corresponding to the timing T11 in FIG. 65) at which the variation effect starts, and all the special effects from the timing T101. From timing T103 after the symbol starts to change (corresponding to timing T12 in FIG. 65), in the image display device 14, timing at which one symbol (first symbol) of the special effect symbols switches from high-speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation. It is set up to T116 (corresponding to timing T15 in FIG. 65).
Timing T103 (in FIG. 65, after 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation effect) after all the special effect symbols have started to vary from the timing T101 when the variation effect starts (corresponding to the timing T11 in FIG. 65). The period up to the timing T12) is a “period in which the effect mode cannot be selected”. Further, after the timing T116 (corresponding to the timing T15 in FIG. 65), the “effect mode non-selectable period” is reached until the timing when the changing effect ends.

  In this example, based on the player's selection operation, the production mode is changed from “production mode AX” to “production mode AY” at timing T104 (corresponding to timing T13 in FIG. 65), and timing T110 (time in FIG. 65). (Corresponding to T14), the “effect mode AY” is changed to the “effect mode AZ”.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 66 (3), “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM”, “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM”, and “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” are at timing T101 (at timing T11 in FIG. 65). From time T120 to time T120 (corresponding to time T18 in FIG. 65).
“Character notice AY1 effect sound” (sound number: CAY1) and “Character notice AZ (1) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ1-1) correspond to timing later than timing T13 in FIG. Are reproduced from timing T106 to timing T109, and “character notice AZ (2) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ2-1) corresponds to timing later than timing T14 in FIG. 65, from timing T112 to timing T115. Will be played.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (4), the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa outputs the output sound of the effect sound in the effect mode other than the effect mode that is being set among the “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, and “effect mode AZ”. Generates a mute instruction and sends it to the VDP 105Ba so as to mute.

  Based on the mute command received from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reproduces the production sound of each of the “production mode AX”, “production mode AY”, and “production mode AZ” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. In the “playback ch” of the effect sound in the effect mode other than the effect mode being set, mute information indicating that the output volume of the effect sound is muted is stored in the mute information storage area of the sound reproduction area. And control to mute.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 66 (5), the output volume of the effect sound in the effect mode being set of “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, and “effect mode AZ” is The volume (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the sound data is multiplied by the master volume of the volume level currently set in the volume level setting area. Also referred to as “volume”), the output volume of the effect sound other than the effect mode being set is set to 0% (silence).

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa starts outputting the effect sound to the VDP 105Ba, the output sound volume of the effect sound is increased from 0% to 100% over a predetermined FI execution time. When a FI command to execute (Fade-in) is transmitted and the output of the production sound is terminated, the production sound output volume is changed from 100% output volume to 0% over a predetermined FO execution time. An FO command to execute FO (fade-out) to be reduced to is transmitted. By such processing, the output volume of the production sound changes gradually, so that the production effect can be enhanced and the player's interest can be improved.

  At the timing T101 (corresponding to the timing T11 in FIG. 65), the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa receives the stereo data of the “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” dedicated to the currently set “effect mode AX” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. Designate the “pair ch3” being played, set the output volume of “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” to 0% at timing T101, and output volume of 100% at timing T102 after timing T101. An FI instruction for performing FI from timing T101 to timing T102 is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores FI information including the content of the FI command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch4” and “ch5” of “pair ch3” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. A process (FI process) is performed in which the output volume of “variable BGM” is set to 0% at timing T101, and the output volume is set to 100% at timing T102.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch3” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be at the timing T104 when the “effect mode AX” switches to the “effect mode AY”, and sets the output volume of the “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM”. An FO instruction is generated to FO from timing T104 to timing T105, with an output volume of 100% at timing T104 (corresponding to timing T13 in FIG. 65) and 0% at timing T105 after timing T104. To the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores the FO information having the content of the FO command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch4” and “ch5” of the “pair ch3” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and the “effect mode AX design” The output volume of “variable BGM” is set to an output volume of 100% at the timing T104, and the process is performed at the timing T105 with 0% (FO processing).

  At timing T104, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa outputs the “production mode AY design fluctuation BGM” output volume in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be in the “production mode AY design fluctuation BGM” stereo dedicated to the changed “production mode AY”. “Pair ch4” from which data is reproduced is designated, 0% at timing T104 (corresponding to timing T13 in FIG. 65), 100% output volume at timing T105, and FI from timing T104 to timing T105. An FI instruction to be executed is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores FI information having the content of the FI command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch6” and “ch7” of the “pair ch4” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and the “effect mode AY design” A process (FI process) is performed in which the output volume of “variable BGM” is set to 0% at timing T104 and the output volume is set to 100% at timing T105.

  Further, at timing T110 (corresponding to timing T14 in FIG. 65), the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch4” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be for the output volume of “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM”, and at timing T110. The output volume is set to 100%, 0% is set at the timing T111 after the timing T109, and the FO command for performing the FO from the timing T110 to the timing T111 is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores the FO information having the content of the FO command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch6” and “ch7” of “pair ch4” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. A process (FO process) is performed in which the output volume of “variable BGM” is set to an output volume of 100% at timing T110 and 0% at timing T111.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa reproduces the sound of the VRAM 105Be for the output volume of the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” at the timing T110 (corresponding to the timing T14 in FIG. 65) at which the “effect mode AY” is switched to the “effect mode AZ”. In the area, “pair ch5” in which the stereo data of the “production mode AZ symbol variation BGM” dedicated to the “production mode AZ” after the change is reproduced is designated as 0% at timing T110 and 100% at timing T111. An FI command for generating FI from timing T110 to timing T111 is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores FI information having the content of the FI command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch8” and “ch9” of the “pair ch5” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and the “effect mode AZ design” A process (FI process) is performed in which the output volume of “variable BGM” is set to 0% at timing T111 and the output volume is set to 100% at timing T112.

  The “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” ends at timing T120 (corresponding to timing T18 in FIG. 65). At that time, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch5” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be for the output volume of the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM”, and the magnitude is 100% at the timing T119 before the timing T120. The output volume is set to 0% at timing T120, and an FO command for FO is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores the FO information having the content of the FO command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch8” and “ch9” of the “pair ch5” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and the “effect mode AZ design” A process (FO process) is performed in which the output volume of “variable BGM” is set to an output volume of 100% at timing T119 and 0% at timing T120.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa outputs a “character notice AY1 effect sound” (sound number: CAY1-1) dedicated to the “effect mode AY” at a timing T106 later than the timing T104 corresponding to the timing T13 in FIG. As for the volume, “pair ch6” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be is designated, set to 0% at timing T106, output volume of 100% at timing T107 after timing T106, and FI from timing T106 to timing T107. An FI instruction to be executed is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores FI information having the content of the FI command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch10” and “ch11” of “pair ch6” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and “character notice AY1 effect” A process (FI process) is performed in which the output volume of “sound” (sound number: CAY1-1) is set to 0% at timing T106, and the output volume is set to 100% at timing T107.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch6” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be for the output volume of the “character notice AY1 effect sound” (sound number: CAY1-1) at the timing T108, and is 100% at the timing T108. An FO command for FO from timing T108 to timing T109 is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores the FO information having the content of the FO instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch10” and “ch11” of “pair ch6” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and “character notice AY1 effect” A process (FO process) is performed in which the output volume of “Sound” (sound number: CAY1-1) is set to 100% output volume at timing T108 and 0% at timing T109.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs “character notice AZ (2) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ2−2) dedicated to “effect mode AZ” at timing T112 after timing T110 corresponding to timing T14 in FIG. For the output volume of 1), “pair ch6” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be is designated, the volume is set to 0% at timing T112, the output volume is set to 100% at timing T113, and FI is output from timing T112 to timing T113. An FI instruction to be executed is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores FI information having the content of the FI command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch10” and “ch11” of “pair ch6” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. 2) A process (FI process) is performed in which the output volume of “1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ2-1) is set to 0% at timing T112 and the output volume is set to 100% at timing T113.

  Further, at timing T114, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch6” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be for the output volume of “character notice AZ (2) 1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ2-1), and the timing. An output sound volume of 100% is set at T114, 0% is set at timing T115, and an FO command for FO from timing T114 to timing T115 is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  The VDP 105Ba stores the FO information having the instruction content of the FO instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa in the fade information storage areas of “ch10” and “ch11” of “pair ch6” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and “character notice AZ ( 2) A process (FO process) is performed in which the output volume of “1 effect sound” (sound number: CAZ2-1) is set to 100% output volume at timing T114 and 0% at timing T115.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa is one of the changing special effect symbols in the image display device 14, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), at the timing T15 in FIG. 65 (corresponding to the timing T116 in FIG. 66). The first symbol (left symbol) is displayed by switching from high-speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation, and at timing T16 in FIG. 65 (corresponding to timing T117 in FIG. 66), control is performed to temporarily stop the first symbol fluctuating in deceleration. . Thereafter, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, at the timing T17 in FIG. 65 (corresponding to the timing T118 in FIG. 66), as shown in FIG. Control for temporarily stopping 2 symbols (right symbol) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 65, during the period from the timing T15 at which the deceleration variation of the first symbol is started (corresponding to the timing T116 in FIG. 66) to the timing T21 at which the variation effect ends, the “effect “Mode AX”, “Production mode AY”, and “Production mode AZ” cannot be changed.
Since the “effect mode AZ” is selected at the timing T15, only the effects of the “effect mode AZ” are executed thereafter until the timing T21.

  As described above, reach is established when the first symbol (left symbol) and the second symbol (right symbol) are temporarily stopped. As a result, at timing T18 shown in FIG. 65 (corresponding to timing T120 in FIG. 66). As shown in FIG. 94 (f), the “normal reach AZ1-1” of the “effect mode AZ” is started together with the output of the voice “reach”. In “normal reach AZ1-1”, as shown in FIG. 94F, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa is a character of the main character unique to “production mode A” in “town” in the background of “production mode AZ”. Control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image indicating that “Character A1” starts a battle journey. The example of FIG. 65 shows an example in which “evolution notice AZ1” is executed in the latter half of “normal reach AZ1-1”. In this “development notice AZ1”, the effects of FIGS. 94 (g) to (h) corresponding to the effects of FIGS. 91 (b) to (f) described above are performed. After that, as shown in the effect image of FIG. 94 (i), it is notified that it will develop into “super reach”.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch3” which is the highest “empty pair ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be at the timing T18 when “normal reach AZ1-1” of the “effect mode AZ” starts. A reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data of “production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / hit)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-N2) is generated and transmitted to VDP 105Ba.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives a playback command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the stereo data of the “production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / hit)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-N2) is received from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the playback command. Basics of the production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / win) (sound number: BGM-AZ-N2) read out, stored in “ch4” and “ch5” of “pair ch3” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be The output volume obtained by multiplying the ratio (%) according to the volume by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be, and “production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / hit)” ( Sound number: BGM-AZ-N2) from the sound output device 15 To control so as to force.

  In the example of FIG. 65, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) or “operation” when the first effect button 18A is pressed during the operation effective period X15 of “development notice AZ1”. A reproduction command of “Sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  In the reproduction timing of monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) based on the operation of the first first effect button 18A for the remaining 1 second or more of the operation valid period X15, FIG. 87 (a). In the sound reproduction area, “symbol fluctuation sound” (sound number: HZ) is reproduced by “ch6” which is one channel of “pair ch4”, and “channel ch4” which is the other channel of “pair ch4” “ “ch7” is “vacant ch”. For this reason, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “ch7” as “reproduction ch” and reproduces monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) by “ch7”. Is transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives a reproduction command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reads monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command, and FIG. 87 (b). As shown in FIG. 5, the sound is stored in “ch7” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be and reproduced, and the ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) is set in the VRAM 105Be. The “output sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area. Control.

  Here, in the example of FIG. 65, when the first effect button 18A is repeatedly hit by the player during the operation effective period X15, the operation sound playback time based on the operation of the first effect button 18A (0.5 seconds). A case will be described in which the operation sound playback timing based on the next operation of the first effect button 18A is reached before the operation ends.

  The monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) and “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) belong to the group of group number “G2”. When the “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) is being reproduced, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that the reproduction of the next “operation sound 2-1” is to be started (YES in step S2602). Thereafter, it is determined that there is “ch7”, which is the “reproduction ch” that is being reproduced as the monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) (YES in step S2605-2), and step S2605 -3, the “ch7” is designated as “reproduction ch” for storing monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) to be reproduced next, and this designated “reproduction ch” A reproduction command for storing and reproducing monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives the reproduction command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the monaural of the “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) being reproduced in “ch7” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be based on the reproduction command. The reproduction is stopped by deleting the data, and thereby the output of the “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) from the sound output device 15 is stopped. Then, the VDP 105Ba reads monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) designated by this reproduction command from the sound data ROM 105Bd, and as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the sound of the VRAM 105Be The volume of the VRAM 105Be is stored in “ch7” designated as “reproduction ch” in the reproduction area and reproduced, and the volume of the VRAM 105Be is set to a ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the operation sound 2-1 (sound number: S2-1). The reproduced monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the volume level set in the level setting area. To control.

  As described above, when the first effect button 18A is repeatedly hit by the player, the “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) based on the operation of the first effect button 18A is being reproduced. Based on the next operation, if it is determined that the reproduction of “operation sound 2-2” belonging to the same group “G2” as “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) is started (in step S2602). YES), then, it is determined that there is “ch7”, which is the “playback ch” that is being played back as the monaural data of “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) (YES in step S2605-2). In step S2605-3, “ch7” is designated as “reproduction ch” for storing monaural data of “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-1) to be reproduced next, and this designated “reproduction” ch ”to“ operation sound 2-2 ”(note number : S2-2 monaural data is stored in) to the VDP105Ba generates a read command to the effect to be reproduced.

  The VDP 105Ba reads monaural data of “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) designated by this reproduction command from the sound data ROM 105Bd, and as shown in FIG. 87 (d), the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. The volume level of the VRAM 105Be is set to a ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2). Control is performed so that monaural data of “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the volume level set in the setting area.

  In this way, when the first effect button 18A is repeatedly hit by the player, in the “ch7” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, “operation sound 2-1” ( When the sound number: S2-1) is output, the next operation of the first effect button 18A is performed, so that the “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) being output is stopped. Then, the output of the operation sound (“operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) or “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2-2) of a new operation is started.

  It should be noted that, for example, when “start winning sound 1” (sound number: SN1) and “start winning sound 2” (sound number: SN2) belonging to the group “G1” are continuously output, the same processing is performed. Accordingly, the “start winning sound 1” (sound number: SN1) being output is stopped, and the output of “start winning sound 2” (sound number: SN2) is started.

At timing T19 in FIG. 65, “super reach AZ1-1” of “effect mode AZ” is started.
In “Super Reach AZ1-1”, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, as shown in FIG. 94 (j), in the “City” in the background of “Direction Mode AZ”, the main character “Character A1” is the enemy character. Control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image having the content for the character “Character A2”.

  At timing T19, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch3” which is the uppermost “empty pair ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and in this “pair ch3”, “direction mode AZ super reach BGM (continuation / hit ) ”(Sound number: BGM-AZ-P2), a reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

When the VDP 105Ba receives a playback command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, based on this playback command, the “play mode AZ super reach BGM (continue / hit) is assigned to“ ch4 ”and“ ch5 ”of the“ pair ch3 ”in the sound playback area of the VRAM 105Be. ) "(Sound number: BGM-AZ-P2) stereo data is stored and played back, according to the basic volume of" production mode AZ super reach BGM (continuation / win) "(sound number: BGM-AZ-P2) The output volume obtained by multiplying the percentage (%) by the master volume of the volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be, and the “production mode AZ super reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM) -AZ-P2) is controlled to be output from the sound output device 15.
As a result, the “production mode AZ super reach BGM” is output from timing T19 to timing T21.

  In the example of FIG. 65, an example is shown in which “Serif notice AZ1” is executed in the first half of “Super Reach AZ1-1”. In the “serif notice AZ1”, when the operation effective period X16 of the first effect button 18A shown in FIG. 65 starts, as shown in FIG. 94 (k), the image of the first effect button 18A (non-projecting state) and As shown in FIG. 94 (l), an operation promotion notification for displaying a character image of “Press!” Is performed, and the first presentation button 18A in the non-projecting state is pressed once. In addition, the image display device 14 displays an effect image (a character image of “Intense heat !!”) in which “Character SZ1”, which is a character unique to the effect mode AZ, says a line “Intense heat !!”. At the same time, the sound output device 15 performs the corresponding effect of outputting the voice of the line (“hot heat!”).

  In the operation valid period X16, when the first effect button 18A is operated, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a reproduction command of “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1) and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba. As shown in FIG. 88A, in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, at the reproduction timing of monaural data of “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1), “ch6” which is one channel of “pair ch4” is used. The “symbol fluctuation sound” (sound number: HZ) is reproduced, and “ch7”, which is the other channel of “pair ch4”, is “empty ch”. For this reason, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “ch7” as “reproduction ch” and generates a reproduction command for reproducing the monaural data of “operation sound 1” (sound number: 1) by “ch7”. It transmits to VDP105Ba. When the VDP 105Ba receives a reproduction command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba stores the monaural data of “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1) in “ch7” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be and reproduces it. , The master of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be at a ratio (%) corresponding to the output volume adjusted based on the basic volume of “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1). Control is performed to output “operation sound 1” (sound number: S1) from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the volumes.

  Then, when the corresponding effect is executed based on the operation of the first effect button 18A, the “line notice AZ1 effect sound” (sound number: RAZ1) is output. In this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa generates a playback instruction of “line notice AZ1 effect sound” (sound number: RAZ1) and transmits it to the VDP 105 </ b> Ba.

  In the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), at the reproduction timing of the stereo data of “serif notice AZ1-compatible production sound” (sound number: RAZ1), “pair ch3” and “production mode AZ super reach”. “BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-P2) is reproduced, and “pair ch4” is the highest “empty pair ch”. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data of the “line ch. AZ1-compatible effect sound” (sound number: RAZ1) in “pair ch4” and transmits the reproduction command to the VDP 105Ba. When the VDP 105Ba receives a playback command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba stores the stereo data of the “sound notice AZ1-compatible effect sound” (sound number: RAZ1) in the “pair ch4” of the sound playback area of the VRAM 105Be based on this playback command. The master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be is set to a ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the “line announcement AZ1-compatible effect sound” (sound number: RAZ1). The sound output device 15 is controlled so as to output the “serif notice AZ-compatible 1 effect sound” (sound number: RAZ1) with the output volume multiplied.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (m), at timing T20 in FIG. 65, the middle symbol of the special effect symbol becomes the same numerical value as the two special symbols together with the effect image in which the main character defeats the enemy character. The stop display indicates that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and the variation effect is ended at timing T21.

  Next, an example of executing a zone effect for changing the BGM based on the control content of the zone effect designated by the start winning designation command in the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The examples of FIGS. 67 to 69 show that the variation in the “zone production scenario 4” (see FIG. 36) is in the variation production pattern AX001, AY001, AZ001 when the special figure fluctuation pattern “E6H00H” is determined. The zone effect starts before one change.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing a fluctuating effect from timing T31 to timing T39.

The sub CPU 102a executes the effect in the effect mode selected from “symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AY1-1”, and “symbol variation AZ1-1” in the period from timing T31 to timing T39. The production control is performed.
In FIG. 67, from the timing T31 until the timing T32 after all the special effects symbols start to fluctuate (for example, after 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation effects), the player's This is the “period in which the effect mode cannot be selected” in which the effect modes AX to AZ cannot be selected by operation.

  In the variable effect where the zone effect is performed, when the zone effect starts, the “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, and “effect mode AZ” cannot be changed based on the player's operation. It is a possible period. In the example of FIG. 67, the period from the timing T32 to the timing T201 at which the zone effect starts is the “effect mode selectable period”, and the period from the timing T201 to the change stop of the timing T39 is the “effect mode non-selectable period”.

In the example of FIG. 67, at the timing T31 when the variation effect starts, the “effect mode AX” is set, and at the timing T33, the “effect mode AX” is changed to the “effect mode AY” based on the player's operation. At timing T34, the “effect mode AY” is changed to the “effect mode AZ” based on the player's operation.
Then, the zone effect starts at the timing T201 after the timing T34, and the “effect mode selectable period” starts from this point.

As shown in FIG. 67, at the timing T201 when the zone effect starts, the change effect of the “effect mode AZ” is switched to the “zone effect”. "Intrusion sound" (sound number: TA) is output from the sound output device 15.
In this case, at timing T201, the liquid crystal control CPU 105A generates a monaural data reproduction command of “rush sound” (sound number: TA) and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba.

At timing T201, the “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is reproduced in “pair ch3” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and the “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” is reproduced in “pair ch4”. (Sound number: BGM-AY-Z) is reproduced, and “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is reproduced in “pair ch5”. As a result, “ch10” of “pair ch6” becomes the highest “vacant ch”.
When the VDP 105Ba receives a playback command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reads monaural data of “rush sound” (sound number: TA) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the playback command and stores it in “ch10” of the sound playback area of the VRAM 105Be. The current value set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be at a ratio (%) according to the output volume that is stored and reproduced and adjusted based on the basic volume of the “rush sound” (sound number: TA) Control is performed so that a “rush sound” (sound number: TA) is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the volume level. Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa displays a large character “Lush in!” On the image display device 14 while outputting this “Like sound” (“Zone entry effect”).

At timing T201, the liquid crystal control CPU 105A generates a stereo data reproduction command of “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba.
At timing T202, “pair ch7” becomes the highest “empty pair ch”. When the VDP 105Ba receives a reproduction command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reads stereo data of “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command, and the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be Is stored in the “pair ch7” and played, and is set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be at a ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L). Control is performed to output “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the current volume level. In the example of FIG. 67, since the “zone effect” of “L zone” is executed, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays the background image from the normal background to the “background L” of “white” in the image display device 14. Control to change.

FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the control processing of the effect sound of the zone effect in the example of FIG.
As shown in FIG. 68 (2), the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is being played with mute, and at timing T301 (corresponding to timing T34 in FIG. 67). By selecting the effect mode AZ, the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is output from the sound output device 15.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (2), the output volume of the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is changed from 0% at the timing T301 to 100% at the timing T302 by the FI processing. Gradually increase to a loud output volume. The output volume of the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is 100% from timing T302 to timing T303.

  When the zone effect starts at timing T303 (corresponding to timing T201 in FIG. 67), as shown in FIG. 68 (1), “rush sound” (sound number: TA) is reproduced from timing T303 to timing T306. .

  When the reproduction of the “rush sound” (sound number: TA) is started, the output volume of the “rush sound” (sound number: TA) by the above-described FI processing by the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and the VDP 105Ba is as shown in FIG. ), The output volume gradually increases from 0% at timing T303 to 100% output volume at timing T304.

During the period from timing T304 to timing T305, the output volume of the “rush sound” (sound number: TA) is maintained at 100%.
When the reproduction of the “rush sound” (sound number: TA) is finished, the output volume of the “rush sound” (sound number: TA) is the timing TT305 by the above-described FO processing by the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and the VDP 105Ba. Gradually decreases from 100% to 0% at timing T306.

  On the other hand, during the period from timing T303 (corresponding to timing T201 in FIG. 67) to timing T304, the output volume of the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is determined by the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and the VDP 105Ba. By the FO process described above, the output volume gradually decreases from 100% at the timing T303 to 0% at the timing T304. After timing T304, the output volume of the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” becomes 0% by the above-described mute processing by the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and the VDP 105Ba.

  As described above, in the gaming machine Y, the sub CPU 102a performs control to change from the effect of outputting the BGM in the effect mode AZ to the effect of outputting the zone BGM (zone effect). The “rush sound” is output as a notification sound for informing the execution of the above. The output volume of “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) of effect mode AZ is being output under the control of liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa and VDP 105Ba. To lower.

As shown in FIG. 68 (1), when reproduction of “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) is started at timing T305, “zone BGM” The output volume of (L) "(sound number: BGM-L) gradually increases from 0% at timing T305 to 100% output volume at timing T306, and from timing T306 to timing T307 ( Until the timing T39 in FIG. 67), the output volume is continuously output at 100%.
In the image display device 14, the background of “town” in “effect mode AZ” is changed to “background L” of “white”.

Next, FIG. 69 shows an example of the zone effect in the change following the zone effect before one change in FIG. 67 of “Zone effect scenario 4”.
In the example of FIG. 69, the zone effect is executed between the timing T41 when the variation effect starts and the timing T45 when the “normal reach AZ1-1” starts. For this reason, the period from the timing T41 at which the variation effect is started to the timing T48 at which the variation effect ends is an “effect mode non-selectable period”. In addition, the “effect mode AZ” is selected from the start timing T41 for the change effect shown in FIG. 69 executed following the change effect shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 69, at timing T41, the liquid crystal control CPU 105A designates “pair ch3” which is the highest “empty pair ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and “zone BGM ( L) ”(sound number: BGM-L), a reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives a reproduction command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reads stereo data of “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command, and the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be Is stored in the “pair ch3” and played back, and is set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be at a ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) Control is performed so that “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volumes of the volume levels.

  In the example of FIG. 67 described above, when the reproduction of “zone BGM” is started, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa adjusts the output volume of the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) being output. The BGM is not output from the sound output device 15 by generating and transmitting a mute command indicating 0%.

  On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 69, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa starts “reproduction mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-) at the start of reproduction of “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) at timing T41. AX-Z), “production mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z), and “rendering mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) are not generated. .

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such an example, and when “zone BGM” is reproduced, “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z), “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” ( A sound command: BGM-AY-Z) and “production mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) are generated and transmitted, and the output volume of these BGMs is set to 0%. The BGM may not be output from the sound output device 15 by generating and transmitting the mute command.

  In the example of FIG. 69, “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) is output between timing T41 and timing T45 in this way. At time T45, since “normal reach AZ1-1” of “effect mode AZ” starts, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, like the example of FIG. 65, the uppermost “empty pair” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. “Pair ch3” that is “ch” is designated, and a playback command for reproducing the stereo data of “Direction mode AZ normal reach BGM (continue / hit)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-N2) with this “Pair ch3” Is transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  When the VDP 105Ba receives a playback command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the stereo data of the “production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / hit)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-N2) is received from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the playback command. A ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the “production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-N2) is read and stored in the “pair ch3” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. ) Multiplied by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be, the “production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / winning)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-N2 ) Is output from the sound output device 15.

  At timing T46, since “super reach AZ1-1” of “effect mode AZ” starts, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa is the highest “vacant” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be as in the example of FIG. “Pair ch3” that is “Pair ch” is designated, and stereo data of “Production mode AZ Super Reach BGM (continue / hit)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-P2) is reproduced with this “Pair ch3” A reproduction command is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

When the VDP 105Ba receives a playback command from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the stereo data of the “production mode AZ super reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-P2) is received from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the playback command. Is read and stored in “pair ch3” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be and reproduced, and the ratio according to the basic volume of the “production mode AZ super reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-P2) (%) Is an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be by “production mode AZ super reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM− AZ-P2) is controlled to be output from the sound output device 15.
In this way, the “production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continuation / hit)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-N2) is output between the timing T45 and the timing T46, and the timing T48 at which the variation production ends from the timing T46. Until then, “production mode AZ super reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM-AZ-P2) is output.

  Next, FIG. 70 shows that when “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern, the “variation effect pattern AX023” of the effect mode AX, the “variation effect pattern AX023” of the effect mode AY, and the effect mode It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the change production performed when the "fluctuation production pattern AZ023" of AZ is determined.

  In this case, effect control for executing the fluctuating effect from timing T51 to timing T60 shown in FIG. 70 is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 70, “effect mode AX” is set in a standby state before timing T51 when the variation effect starts, and at timing T51, “symbol variation AX1-1” of “effect mode AX” is set. Is started. In addition, after all the special effect symbols start to fluctuate from the timing T51 when the variation effect starts (for example, 0.7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation effect (at this time, all the special effect symbols have fluctuated at high speed). The period until the timing T52)) is a “production mode non-selectable period”. Thereafter, at timing T53 during the “effect mode selectable period”, the effect mode is changed from “effect mode AX” to “effect mode AY” based on the player's selection operation.

In the period from timing T51 to timing T57, the effect in the effect mode selected from “symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AY1-1”, and “symbol variation AZ1-1” is executed.
In the period from timing T57 to timing T58, the “normal reach AY1-1” of the “production mode AY” selected by the player is executed, and in the period from timing T58 to timing T60, the player has selected it. “Special reach AY1-1” of “effect mode AY” is executed.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining specific contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect executed in the example shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 70, the “effect mode AX” is set based on the player's selection operation before the start of the change effect. Therefore, at the timing T51 when the changing effect starts, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays a plurality of special effects together with the background image of “mountain” in the “effect mode AX” as shown in FIG. Control is performed to display an effect image that is displayed in a variable manner.

  At timing T51, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z), “effect mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z), “effect mode”. A reproduction command for each of the “AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  When the fluctuating effect starts at the timing T51, the “effect mode AX” is already selected at that time. Therefore, stereo data of “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is output at 100% output volume in “pair ch3” of the sound reproduction area, and “effect mode AY” “ Stereo data of effect mode AY symbol variation BGM (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) and stereo data of effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) of effect mode AZ Are reproduced in “pair ch4” and “pair ch5”, respectively, but the output volume is reduced to 0% by the mute processing.

Then, at the timing T52 in the “symbol variation AX1-1”, when the effect mode is changed from the “effect mode AX” to the “effect mode AY” based on the player's selection operation, in the image display device 14, As shown in FIGS. 95 (b) to 95 (d), control is performed to change the background image to “beach” in the “effect mode AY”.
The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa outputs the stereo data of “production mode AY symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) at 100% output volume in “pair ch4”, and the “production mode AX” “production mode”. Stereo data of “AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) and stereo data of “rendering mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) of “rendering mode AZ”, respectively. Although reproduced in “Pair ch3” and “Pair ch5”, the output volume is reduced to 0% by the mute processing.

  As shown in FIG. 70, during the period from timing T54 to timing T60, it is impossible to change “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, and “effect mode AZ” even by a player's change operation. This is the “period in which the production mode cannot be selected”. In the example of FIG. 70, since the “effect mode AY” is selected at the timing T53, the period up to the timing T60 thereafter is the background of “beach” as shown in FIGS. 95 (b) to (l). Only the effect of “effect mode AY” is executed, in which an image is displayed and dedicated BGM is output to effect mode AY.

As described above, reach is established when the first symbol (left symbol) and the second symbol (right symbol) are temporarily stopped. As a result, at timing T57 shown in FIG. 70, as shown in FIG. 95 (e). In addition, the “normal reach AY1-1” in the “production mode AY” is started together with the output of the voice “reach”. In “normal reach AY1-1”, as shown in FIG. 95E, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa is a character of the main character unique to “production mode A” in “beach” in the background of “production mode AY”. Control is performed to cause the image display device 14 to display an effect image indicating that “Character A1” starts a battle journey.
The example of FIG. 70 shows an example in which “evolution notice AY1” is executed in the second half of “normal reach AY1-1”. In the “development notice AY1”, the effects shown in FIGS. 95 (f) to (g) corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (b) to (f) are performed. After that, as shown in the effect image of FIG. 95 (h), the fact that it develops to “special reach” is notified.

  At timing T57, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa designates “pair ch3” which is the uppermost “empty pair ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and “play mode AY normal reach BGM (continuation / hit)” by this “pair ch3”. "(Sound number: BGM-AY-N2)" is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba. Based on this reproduction command, the VDP 105Ba reproduces stereo data of “production mode AY normal reach BGM (continuation / hit)” (sound number: BGM-AY-N2) from “timing ch3” from timing T57 to timing T58.

  In addition, when the first effect button 18A is operated by the player during the operation effective period X23 of the “development notice AY1”, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa outputs an operation sound for each operation. As described above, after the “operation sound 2-1” (sound number: S2-1) is output, when the image of the meter value 0 is displayed, “operation sound 2-2” (sound number: S2). -2) is output.

At timing T58, “special reach AY1-1” of “effect mode AY” is started.
In “Special Reach AZ1-1”, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, as shown in FIG. 95 (i), “Character A1” as the main character in the “Beach” in the background of “Direction Mode AY” Control for causing the image display device 14 to display an effect image having the content of fighting the character “Character A3” is performed.
Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a reproduction command of “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba.

  At timing T58, “pair ch3” is the highest “empty pair ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. The VDP 105Ba reads stereo data of “effect mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command received from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, and reproduces the sound of the VRAM 105Be. The volume level of the VRAM 105Be is stored in the “pair ch3” of the area and reproduced, and the volume level of the VRAM 105Be is set to a ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1). The “output mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is output from the sound output device 15 at an output volume obtained by multiplying the master volume of the volume level set in the setting area. To control.

  The stereo data of this “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is composed of a “B melody” portion (a portion in which the tone of the music changes), which will be described later. Processing is performed, and the sound data portion of the predetermined section to be reproduced last is repeatedly reproduced a plurality of times.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in “Special Reach AY1-1”, “Production Mode AY Special Reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY) composed of “B Melo” part (part in which the tone of the music changes). -Q1) is played back, and the sound data portion of the last predetermined section is repeatedly played back a plurality of times, and the volume is gradually reduced during that time.

In the example of FIG. 70, “decided effect AY1” is executed as “decided effect AY” in the second half of “special reach AY1-1”. As shown in FIG. 95 (j), when the operation effective period of “determination effect AY1” starts, the first effect button 18A enters the protruding state, and the image display device 14 displays the image of the first effect button 18A (protruding state) and An operation promotion notification for displaying a character image “Press!” Is performed.
The liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa stops the reproduction of the “effect mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) at the timing when the operation effective period of the “determination effect AY1” starts. In the operation effective period, the BGM is not reproduced until the first effect button 18A is operated or until the operation effective period ends without being operated. For this reason, in this operation effective period, the screen may be darkened without displaying the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. 95 (j).

  When the first effect button 18A is operated during the operation effective period or when the operation effective period ends without operation, the “effect mode AY special reach BGM (second half, hit)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q2) is reproduced. This “production mode AY special reach BGM (second half, hit)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q2) is composed of a “rust” portion (the most exciting part of the music), and during the reproduction, FIG. 95 (k) As shown in the figure, the corresponding effect of “decision effect AY1” in which the first decorative member 17A operates is executed. In this corresponding effect, a “decision effect AY1 effect sound” (sound number: KAY1) is reproduced. Thus, BGM is not reproduced immediately before the corresponding effect of the “decision effect” and becomes silent, so that the player's interest can be increased and a high expectation for the jackpot can be given.

  During the operation effective period of this “decision effect AY1,” an effect sound of operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the first effect button 18A consisting of a voice “press!” Is output after a silent state in which BGM is not reproduced. You may do it.

  It should be noted that “production mode AY special reach BGM (second half, loss)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q3), which is output in “special reach” executed when the determination result of jackpot determination is “losing”, BGM in which a musical piece portion different from the “rust” portion is reproduced. Only when the judgment result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, in the “decision effect”, the “climax” portion that is most exciting in the music is played, and the BGM notifies the player that the jackpot has been won be able to.

In addition, when “Special Reach AY1-1” starts, “Big Jack Finalize Sound” (sound number: PF) is output as “Big Jack Finalize Effect”.
In the “special reach AY1-1”, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa converts the monaural data of the “big hit definite sound” (sound number: PF) into the “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-). Generate a playback command to play back “ch6” of “pair ch4”, which is the highest “vacant pair ch”, which is one channel number higher than “pair ch3” for playing back the stereo data of Q1) It transmits to VDP105Ba. The VDP 105Ba reads monaural data of “big hit definite sound” (sound number: PF) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the reproduction command received from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, and “ch6” of “pair ch4” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. Is output by adjusting the master volume value of the volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be based on the basic volume of the “big hit definite sound” (sound number: PF), Control is performed so that a “big hit definite sound” (sound number: PF) is output from the sound output device 15.

  Note that this “big hit definite sound” (sound number: PF) is an effect that rarely occurs during a game. Therefore, in order to ensure that the “big hit definite sound” is notified to the player, it is output at the maximum output volume that the gaming machine Y can output regardless of the set master volume. May be.

  In addition, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa converts the stereo data of the “decided effect AY1 effect sound” (sound number: KAY1) of the “decided effect AY1” in the “special reach AY1-1” into the “effect mode AY special reach BGM (first half). ) ”(Sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) that reproduces stereo data“ pair ch3 ”, which is one higher channel number than“ pair ch3 ”, which is the highest“ empty pair ch ”. A reproduction command is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba reads stereo data of “determined effect AY1 effect sound” (sound number: KAY1) from the sound data ROM 105Bd based on the playback command received from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, and stores it in “pair ch4” of the sound playback area of the VRAM 105Be. And the ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the “decided effect AY1 effect sound” (sound number: KAY1) is multiplied by the master volume of the volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. Control is performed so that the sound output device 15 outputs “decided effect AY1 effect sound” (sound number: KAY1) at the output volume.

Here, the delay process will be described.
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of delay processing performed on sound data.
The sound data (stereo data) of “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is subjected to the delay process shown in FIG. Yes. In this delay process, “sound data portion D1” is cut out from “sound data portion D”, and four of the cut out “sound data portion D1” are added to “sound data portion D”.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 71, for example, after the “sound data portion D1” is reproduced at the timings a1 to a2, the “sound data portion D1” is repeatedly reproduced at the timing a2 to the timing a3 for the first time ( "Sound data portion D1" is reproduced repeatedly at the second time (second repeated reproduction) at timing a3 to timing a4, and "Sound data portion D1" is thirdly reproduced at timing a4 to timing a5. Are repeatedly reproduced (third repeated reproduction), and the “sound data portion D1” is reproduced for the fourth time at the timings a5 to a6 (fourth repeated reproduction).

  The sound data of “effect mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) subjected to such delay processing is stored in the sound data ROM 105Bd.

The sound data of the “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) gradually increases from 100% to 0% from the timing a2 to the timing a6 shown in FIG. Is lowered.
In this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs the “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY) in the first repeated reproduction of the “sound data portion D1” at the timings a2 to a3 shown in FIG. -"P1 ch3" in which stereo data of Q1) is specified, and the output volume of stereo data of "Production mode AY Special Reach BGM (first half)" (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) at timing a2 Is set to 100%, and is set to 75% at timing a3, and an FO command for gradually decreasing from 100% to 75% from timing a2 to timing a3 is generated and transmitted to VDP 105Ba.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-) in the second repeated reproduction of “sound data portion D1” at timing a3 to timing a4 shown in FIG. “Pair ch3” storing the stereo data of Q1) is designated, and the output volume of stereo data of “Production mode AY Special Reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is set at timing a3. 75%, 50% at timing a4, and an FO command that gradually decreases from 75% to 50% from timing a3 to timing a4 is generated and transmitted to VDP 105Ba.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-) in the third repeated reproduction of “sound data portion D1” at timing a4 to timing a5 shown in FIG. “Pair ch3” storing the stereo data of Q1) is designated, and the output volume of the stereo data of “Production mode AY Special Reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is set at timing a4. 50%, 25% at timing a5, and a FO command for gradually decreasing from 50% to 25% from timing a4 to timing a5 is generated and transmitted to VDP 105Ba.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa performs “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-) in the fourth repeated reproduction of “sound data portion D1” at timing a5 to timing a6 shown in FIG. “Pair ch3” in which the stereo data of Q1) is specified, and at the timing a5, the output volume of the stereo data of “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is set. The FO command is generated to be gradually reduced from 25% to 0% from timing a5 to timing a6, and is transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

In addition, the example which performs a delay process with respect to sound data is not limited to this.
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining another example in which delay processing is performed on sound data.
In this case, the delay process is to add sound data of “delay SE” consisting of four “sound data part D1” specified from “sound data part D” to “sound data part D”. The sound data of the “effect mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) subjected to the delay process is stored in the sound data ROM 105Bd.
Also in the sound data of “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) of this example, the output volume is 0 from 100% from timing a2 to timing a6 shown in FIG. % Gradually decreases.

  In the example of FIG. 72, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa stores stereo data of “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) at timing a2 to timing a6 shown in FIG. “Pair ch3” is designated, and at timing a2, the stereo data output volume of “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is set to 100%, and at timing a6 The FO command is generated to reduce the size from 100% to 0% from timing a2 to timing a6, and is transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

FIG. 73 is a diagram for describing the temporal flow of the effect sound control process in “special reach AY1-1” shown in FIG.
In FIG. 73, “special reach AY1-1” is executed from timing T501 (corresponding to timing T58 in FIG. 70) to timing T512 (corresponding to timing T60 in FIG. 70) at which the changing effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (1), in the period from the timing T501 to the timing T506, a stereo of “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) (“B melody” portion) Data is reproduced in “pair ch3”. Also, in “Special Reach AY1-1”, as shown in FIG. 73 (4), “timing winning sound” (sound number: PF) is “pair 6” “ch6” as “big winning finalizing effect” at timing T202. "Is played.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (2), the sound data portion subjected to the delay process is reproduced during the period from the timing T504 to the timing T506. Specifically, in the period from timing T504 to timing T505, “sound data portion D1” in “sound data portion D” of “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1). Is reproduced, and during the period from timing T505 to timing T506, the “sound data portion D1” is repeatedly reproduced four times.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (3), the output volume of the “production mode AY special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is 0% from the timing T501 to the timing T502 by the FI processing. The output gradually rises from the magnitude to 100%, and the output volume of 100% is maintained from timing T502 to timing T505. As shown in FIG. 73 (5), the operation valid period is increased from timing T505. At the start timing T506, the output sound volume is gradually reduced from 100% to 0% by the FO processing on the sound data portion subjected to the delay processing, and becomes 0% at the timing T506. The reproduction of “special reach BGM (first half)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q1) is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (6), “operation sound 3” (sound number: S3) is reproduced at timing T507 when the first effect button 18A is operated during the operation effective period. Then, the operation effective period ends at timing T508, and as shown in FIG. 73 (1), “effect mode AY special reach BGM (second half, hit)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q2) is reproduced. This “effect mode AY special reach BGM (second half, hit)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q2) is reproduced until timing T512 when the changing effect ends.

  In the “production mode AY special reach BGM (second half, hit)” (sound number: BGM-AY-Q2), the output volume is 0% to 100% by the FI process from the timing T508 to the timing T509 when the operation valid period ends. From timing T509 to timing T511, 100% output volume is maintained, and from timing T511 to timing T512, the output volume gradually increases from 100% to 0% by the FO process. Is lowered.

  Also, from timing T509 to timing T510, “determined effect AZ (winning) corresponding effect sound” (sound number: as the effect sound of “decided effect AZ1” executed as the corresponding effect based on the operation of the first effect button 18A. KAZa) is played back.

Next, FIG. 74 shows a case where “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern, “variation effect pattern AX025” in effect mode AX, “variation effect pattern AX025” in effect mode AY, effect mode It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the change production performed when the "fluctuation production pattern AZ025" of AZ is determined.
74 is the same as the effects of “symbol fluctuation” and “normal reach” and “super reach” shown in FIG. 65, and “symbol fluctuation”, “normal reach” and “special reach” shown in FIG. Therefore, the description of the same points is omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, “effect mode AX” is set in the standby state before timing T61 when the variation effect starts, and at timing T61, “symbol variation AX1-1” of “effect mode AX” is set. "Is started. In addition, from timing T61, after all the special effect symbols start to fluctuate from the start of the variation effect (for example, 0.7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation effect (at this time, all the special effect symbols fluctuate at high speed). ))) Until “timing mode selectable period” until timing T62, and “timing mode selectable period” from timing T62 to timing T64 when the first symbol changes from high speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation. It is.

  At timing T63 during the “effect mode selectable period”, the effect mode is changed from “effect mode AX” to “effect mode AY” based on the player's selection operation.

  In the period from the timing T61 to the timing T67, the effect in the effect mode selected from “symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AY1-1”, and “symbol variation AZ1-1” is executed.

  In the period from timing T67 to timing T68, the “normal reach AY1-1” of the selected “effect mode AY” is executed, and in the period from timing T68 to timing T69, the selected “effect mode AY”. “Super Reach AY1-1” is executed, and during the period from timing T69 to timing T71, “special reach AY1-1” of the selected “effect mode AY” is executed.

  Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 74, the same processing as the processing described in the examples of FIGS. 65 and 70 is performed, and “symbol variation AX1-1”, “symbol variation AY1-1”, “symbol variation AZ1-” is performed. 1 ”,“ Normal reach AY1-1 ”,“ Super reach AY1-1 ”, and“ Special reach AY1-1 ”are output. In this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a reproduction command for reproducing the sound data of each effect sound on each designated channel and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba. Based on the playback command received from the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, the VDP 105Ba reads the sound data of each effect sound from the sound data ROM 105Bd, stores it in the designated channel in the sound playback area of the VRAM 105Be, and plays it back. The sound output device outputs the sound data of each effect sound at the output volume obtained by multiplying the ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the data by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. 15 is controlled to output.

Next, the effect sound in the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG.
In the jackpot game executed when “16R jackpot” is won, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “opening effect sound 1” (sound number: OM1) is output at the opening, and in the 16R round game, “ Round effect sound 1 ”(sound number: RM1) is repeatedly output, and“ ending effect sound 1 ”(sound number: EM1) is output during ending.

  In the “16R jackpot”, during the round game from “1R” to “16R”, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the “A melody” portion, the “B melody” portion, and the “rust” portion A loop in which “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) consisting of is repeatedly played back in the order of “A melody” portion, “B melody” portion, and “rust” portion and then returns to the “A melody” portion. Playback (repeated playback) is performed.

At the start of the opening, no sound data is stored in any of “Pair ch3” to “Pair ch7” for reproducing the effect in the sound reproduction area. Thereby, at the start of the opening shown in FIG. 75A, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa converts the stereo data of “opening effect sound 1” (sound number: OM1) to “pair ch3” which is the highest “empty pair ch”. A reproduction command for reproduction is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.
The VDP 105Ba reads stereo data of “opening effect sound 1” (sound number: OM1) from the sound data ROM 105Bd, stores it in “pair ch3” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and reproduces it. At this time, the VDP 105Ba multiplies the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be by the ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the “opening effect sound 1” (sound number: OM1). Control is performed so that the “output effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) is output from the sound output device 15 at the combined output volume. When the opening is finished, the stereo data output of “opening effect sound 1” (sound number: OM1) is stopped.

At the start of “1R” shown in FIG. 75A, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a sound data reproduction command of “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba.
At the start of “1R”, as described above, no sound data is stored in “pair ch3”. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a playback command for loop playback of the stereo data of “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) in this “pair ch3” which is the highest “empty pair ch”. To the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba reads the stereo data of “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) from the sound data ROM 105Bd and stores it in “pair ch3”, which is the highest “empty pair ch” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, Loop playback is performed during the period from “1R” to “16R”. During loop playback, “ch4” and “ch5” of “pair ch3” store information indicating that “loop playback” is being executed in the storage area of “loop playback”.

In the loop reproduction of stereo data of “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1), as shown in FIG. 75A, when “1R” starts, the “A melody” portion is reproduced, and then “ Loop playback is performed until the end of “16R”, in which playback is performed in the order of the “B melody” portion and the “rust” portion and then returns to the “A melody” portion.
At this time, VDP 105Ba multiplies the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of VRAM 105Be by the ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of round effect sound 1 ”(sound number: RM1). The sound output device 15 is controlled to output “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) at the output volume. At the timing when “16R” ends, stereo data output of “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) is stopped.

At the start of ending, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a sound data reproduction command of “ending effect sound 1” (sound number: EM1) and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba.
At the start of “ENDING”, as described above, no sound data is stored in “PAIR ch3”. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a playback command to play back the stereo data of the “ending effect sound 1” (sound number: EM1) in this “pair ch3” which is the highest “empty pair ch”. It transmits to VDP105Ba.
The VDP 105Ba reads the stereo data of “ending effect sound 1” (sound number: EM1) from the sound data ROM 105Bd, stores it in the channel designated by “pair ch3” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and reproduces it. At this time, the VDP 105Ba multiplies the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be by the ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the “ending effect sound 1” (sound number: EM1). Control is performed so that “ending effect sound 1” (sound number: EM1) is output from the sound output device 15 at the combined output volume.

  Also, in the jackpot game that is executed when “4R jackpot” is won, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), “opening effect sound 2” (sound number: OM2) is output at the opening, and the 4R round game is played. “Round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) is repeatedly output, and “Ending effect sound 2” (sound number: EM2) is output during ending.

  In this case, the sound data of “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) consists only of the “rust” portion of “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1), as shown in FIG. 75 (b). During the round game from “1R” to “4R”, the sound data of “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) is loop-reproduced (repeatedly reproduced). Note that the sound data of “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) may be composed only of the “rust” portion of another song different from “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1). Good.

At the start of the opening shown in FIG. 75 (b), the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a sound data reproduction command of “opening effect sound 2” (sound number: OM2) and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba.
The VDP 105Ba reads the stereo data of “Opening effect sound 2” (sound number: OM2) from the sound data ROM 105Bd, stores it in the designated channel in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, and reproduces it. At this time, the VDP 105Ba multiplies the ratio (%) according to the basic volume of the “opening effect sound 2” (sound number: OM2) by the master volume of the current volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. Control is performed so that the “output effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) is output from the sound output device 15 at the combined output volume. When the opening ends, stereo data output of “opening effect sound 2” (sound number: OM2) is stopped.

Then, at the start of “1R” shown in FIG. 75 (b), the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa receives “round effect sound 2” (sound number: EM <b> 2) in “pair ch <b> 3” which is the highest “empty pair ch”. A reproduction command for reproducing the stereo data is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.
The VDP 105Ba reads stereo data of “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) from the sound data ROM 105Bd and stores it in “pair ch3” of the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, during the period of “1R” to “4R”. Make loop playback. During loop playback, “ch4” and “ch5” of “pair ch3” store information indicating that “loop playback” is being executed in the storage area of “loop playback”.

In the loop reproduction of stereo data of “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2), as shown in FIG. 75B, when “1R” starts, “round effect sound 1” (sound number: RM1) Loop playback is performed until the end of “16R”, in which the “A melody” portion is reproduced from the beginning to the end and then the “A melody” portion is returned to the beginning.
At this time, the VDP 105Ba multiplies the ratio (%) according to the basic volume of “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) by the master volume of the volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. Control is performed so that “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) is output from the sound output device 15 at the output volume. When it is time to finish “4R”, stereo data output of “round effect sound 2” (sound number: RM2) is stopped.

Further, at the start of ending, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa generates a sound data reproduction command of “ending effect sound 2” (sound number: EM2) and transmits it to the VDP 105Ba as shown in FIG. 75 (b).
The VDP 105Ba reads stereo data of “ending effect sound 2” (sound number: EM2) from the sound data ROM 105Bd, and stores it in “ch4” and “ch5” of “pair ch3” in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be for reproduction. At this time, the VDP 105Ba is obtained by multiplying the ratio (%) corresponding to the basic volume of the ending effect sound 2 ”(sound number: EM2) by the master volume of the volume level set in the volume level setting area of the VRAM 105Be. Control is performed so that “ending effect sound 2” (sound number: EM2) is output from the sound output device 15 at the output volume. When it is time to end the ending, the output of stereo data of “Ending effect sound 2” (sound number: EM2) is stopped.

  The jackpot game enjoys profits for the player and raises the player's mood. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, during the execution of the jackpot game, the most prominent “rust” portion of the music is surely reproduced. Since “16R jackpot” has a long round game time, the “A melody” portion, the “B melody” portion, and the “rust” portion are played in order and gradually increased. On the other hand, “4R jackpot” is “Rabi” without replaying “A melody” and “B melody” so that the “Rabi” portion does not end without being heard because the round game time is short. "Only the part is played back in a loop, and the big hit game is excited.

  Note that the present embodiment is not limited to the one described above.

  In the above example, when the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that there is no empty channel in which no sound data is stored in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, the sound data having the lowest priority is reproduced in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be. The middle channel is designated as “playback ch” for playing the next sound data. In this case, in this “reproduction ch”, the sound data to be reproduced next is stored after the stored sound data being reproduced is erased.

However, the present embodiment is not limited to the example in which the channel in which the sound data having the lowest “priority” is being played is set as the “playback ch” in which the sound data is played next.
For example, a channel in which sound data having the shortest “remaining reproduction time” is being reproduced may be set as a “reproduction ch” in which sound data is reproduced next. Further, for example, among the sound data with the lowest “priority”, the channel on which the sound data with the shortest “remaining reproduction time” is being reproduced may be set as the “reproduction ch” for reproducing the sound data next.

  Also, for example, a channel in which sound data having the shortest “remaining playback time” is being played out of sound data having a specific “priority” or lower may be used as a “playback ch” in which sound data is played back next. Further, for example, a channel in which sound data having the earliest “reproduction order” is being reproduced may be a “reproduction channel” in which sound data is reproduced next.

  Further, for example, among the sound data with the lowest “priority”, the channel in which the sound data with the earliest “reproduction order” is being reproduced may be the “reproduction ch” for reproducing the sound data next. Further, for example, among sound data of a specific “priority” or lower, a channel in which sound data having the earliest “reproduction order” is being reproduced may be a “reproduction ch” in which sound data is reproduced next.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 68 described above, from the variation effect of the effect mode AZ that outputs “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) as the “first effect”. As the “second effect”, control is performed to change to the zone effect that outputs “zone BGM (L)” (sound number: BGM-L) based on the start winning designation command, and the zone effect (second effect). When starting the execution of “Zoom”, a “rush sound” (sound number: TA) is output as a notification sound for notifying the execution of the zone effect, and during the output of the “rush sound”, the “effect mode AZ symbol variation BGM” ”(Sound number: BGM-AZ-Z).

  However, when the execution of the “second effect” is started, the notification sound for notifying the execution of the “second effect” is output, and the output volume of the effect sound of the “first effect” is output during the output of the notification sound. An example of lowering is not limited to the example of FIG. In this example, the “effect mode AX”, the “effect mode AY”, and the “effect mode AZ” in the “effect mode selectable period” described with reference to FIG. 65 and the like are changed based on the player's operation. Can be applied in case.

For example, instead of the change effect of the effect mode AZ that outputs the “effect mode AZ symbol change BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) as the “first effect”, the “effect” When the change effect of the effect mode AX that outputs the mode AX symbol change BGM (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is started, the above-described “rush sound” is used as a notification sound for informing the execution of the “second effect”. In place of "", a notification sound for notifying the execution of the "effect mode AX" (for example, a voice saying "It is the effect mode AX") is output, and the output volume is gradually increased from 0% to 100% by the FI processing. To be raised.
While the FI processing is performed on the output volume of the notification sound, the output volume of the “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is reduced from 100% by the FO processing. Reduce gradually to 0%. After that, the output volume of “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z) is set to 0% by mute processing.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa determines that there is no channel (vacant channel) in which no sound data is stored in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, the “priority” of the sound data to be reproduced is If it is determined that it is lower than the “priority” of any sound data reproduced in the sound reproduction area of the VRAM 105Be, the sound data may not be reproduced (a reproduction command is not transmitted).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, all special effect designs fluctuate in the variable effect during the standby state before the start of the variable effect during the “effect mode selectable period”. One symbol (first symbol) of the special effect symbol after the start (for example, after 0.7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable effect (all special effect symbols are changing at this time)) An example in which the period between the high-speed fluctuation and the timing of switching to the deceleration fluctuation is described. However, the “production mode selectable period” is not limited to this.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 89, the “effect mode selectable period” may be a standby state before timing T11 and a period from timing T12 to timing T19 when “normal reach” ends.

  In this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, at the timing T11 when the variation effect starts, similarly to the example of FIG. 65, “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z), “effect mode AY symbol variation. Reproduction commands for “BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) and “production mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) are generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  In the example of FIG. 89, since the “production mode selectable period” is also in the timing T18 at which “normal reach” starts, “production mode AX normal reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM-AX-N2 ), “Playing Mode AY Normal Reach BGM (Continuous / Win)” (Sound Number: BGM-AY-N2), “Playing Mode AZ Normal Reach BGM (Continuous / Win)” (Sound Number: BGM-AZ-N2) An instruction is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 90, the “effect mode selectable period” includes a standby state before timing T11 and a timing before timing T20 at which the fluctuation of the three special effects symbols stops from timing T12. It may be a period up to T12A.

  In this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, at the timing T11 when the variation effect starts, similarly to the example of FIG. 65, “effect mode AX symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AX-Z), “effect mode AY symbol variation. Reproduction commands for “BGM” (sound number: BGM-AY-Z) and “production mode AZ symbol variation BGM” (sound number: BGM-AZ-Z) are generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba.

  In the example of FIG. 90, the “effect mode selectable period” is also in the timing T18 at which “normal reach” starts and the timing T19 at which “super reach” starts. From this, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa, at the timing T18 when “normal reach” starts, “production mode AX normal reach BGM (continuation / win)” (sound number: BGM-AX-N2), “production mode AY normal reach BGM (continuation). / Sound) "(sound number: BGM-AY-N2)," production mode AZ normal reach BGM (continue / hit) "(sound number: BGM-AZ-N2), respectively, to generate and transmit to VDP105Ba At timing T19 when “Super Reach” starts, “Direction Mode AX Super Reach BGM (Continue / Win)” (Sound Number: BGM-AX-P2), “Direction Mode AY Super Reach BGM (Continue / Win)” (Sound Number: BGM-AY-P2), “Direction Mode AZ Super Reach BG (Continued / per) ": to send (sound number BGM-AZ-P2) to generate the respective reproduction instruction to VDP105Ba.

  However, in the example of FIG. 89 or FIG. 90, the sub CPU 102a does not change the “effect mode AX” even if any effect mode of “effect mode AX”, “effect mode AY”, or “effect mode AZ” is currently set. ”,“ Effect mode AY ”, and“ effect mode AZ ”, when the“ operation effective period ”starts, the currently set effect mode is set in the period from the start to the end of the“ operation effective period ”. It cannot be changed (the “production mode selectable period” is invalidated).

  Further, in the “development notice” of the above-described embodiment, when the operation effective period becomes less than 1 second and the development progresses to “super reach”, the meter value of the gauge is set to 0 and the first effect button When the operation sound of 18A is changed and does not develop into “super reach”, the operation value of the first effect button 18A is not changed without setting the gauge meter value to 0 (FIG. 53 (a), ( b) and FIG. 91).

  However, the control may be performed based on the number of operations of the first effect button 18A during the operation effective period instead of the remaining period of the operation effective period.

  For example, in the case of developing to “super reach”, the gauge value of the gauge is set to 0 and the operation sound is set to “operation sound 2-1” by operating the first effect button 18A 15 times or more in the operation effective period. (Picone) is changed to “operation sound 2-2” (kern). On the other hand, if it does not develop into “super reach”, even if the first effect button 18A is operated 15 times or more in the operation effective period, the meter value of the gauge is not set to 0, and the operation sound is changed to “operation sound 2-1. ”(Picone).

  In addition, when it does not develop into “super reach”, it may be determined by lottery according to the ratio (%) associated with the variable effect pattern to which value the gauge meter value is reduced. .

  In the above-described embodiment, when the BGM is reproduced, the BGM is reproduced with the “empty pair ch” after the “pair ch3” used for the production sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “pair ch3” to “pair ch5” may be used as dedicated “pair ch” for BGM, similarly to “pair ch0” and “pair ch1” for error notification sounds. In this case, the sound data of other effect sounds is reproduced after “Pair ch6”.

In the above-described embodiment, for the BGM output in the variation effect, at the start timing of the variation effect, a reproduction command of the symbol variation BGM of the effect modes AX to AZ is generated and transmitted, and at the start timing of “normal reach”. Generate and send a BGM playback command for normal reach in the selected production mode, such as generating and sending a production sound playback command to be played at that production at the start timing of each production. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any BGM that may be played in the production modes AX to AZ is loop-reproduced with the mute processing performed while the game is being executed, and the start timing of each production Then, the mute for the BGM used for the production may be canceled and output. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the BGM from always being reproduced from the same position at the start timing of each effect such as the start of fluctuation and the start of normal reach.

  In the above embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88, in “ch0” to “ch3” dedicated to the error notification sound, “ch0” includes error notification sound 1 (abnormal winning prize). (Error) ”(sound number: E1),“ ch1 ”is“ error notification sound 2 (magnetic detection error) ”(sound number: E2) monaural data,“ ch2 ”is“ error ” The monaural data of “notification sound 3 (door opening error)” (sound number: E3) and the “monaural data of“ error notification sound 4 (bottom plate full error) ”(sound number: E4) are stored in advance in“ ch3 ”. The example of storing in the “stop” state has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and in “ch0” to “ch3” dedicated to error notification sound, if an error occurs without storing monaural data of these error notification sounds in advance, When the monaural data of the error notification sound of the error that has occurred is stored in “ch0” to “ch3” and played back, and the error notification cancellation condition for the error that has occurred is satisfied and the error notification sound is stopped, the error notification Playback may be stopped by erasing the monaural data of the sound.

Further, the number of types of errors designated in advance in the gaming machine Y may be larger than the number of channels 4 of “ch0” to “ch3” dedicated to the error notification sound. Here, an example in which five types of errors are designated in advance will be described.
In this case, it is assumed that monaural data of any error notification sound is not stored in “ch0” to “ch3” dedicated to the error notification sound when no error has occurred. Then, “first error” having the highest priority (abnormal winning error), “second error” having the second highest priority (magnetic detection error), and “third error” having the third highest priority (impact) Detection error), “fourth error” (door opening error) having the fourth highest priority, and “fifth error” (bottom pan full error) having the lowest priority are all generated.
The “first error notification sound” is the “first error notification sound”, the “second error” notification sound is the “second error notification sound”, and the “third error” notification sound is the “third error notification sound”. The notification sound of “sound” and “fourth error” is referred to as “fourth error notification sound”, and the notification sound of “fifth error” is referred to as “fifth error notification sound”.

  In this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa sets monaural data of “first error notification sound” having the highest notification priority to “ch0” and “second error notification sound” having the second highest priority to “ch1”. The “third error notification sound” monaural data having the third highest priority for “ch2”, and the “fourth error notification sound” monaural data having the fourth highest priority for “ch3”. Each is stored, and the monaural data of the “fifth error notification sound” having the lowest priority is not stored. Then, among the “first error notification sound” to “fourth error notification sound”, only the “first error notification sound” having the highest priority is reproduced, and the “second error notification sound” to “fourth error notification sound” are reproduced. “Sound” is stored in a “stop” state.

  Thereafter, when the error notification cancellation condition of “first error notification sound” is satisfied, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa deletes the monaural data of “first error notification sound” in “ch0” and then generates the “fifth error notification sound”. "Monaural data of" fifth error notification sound ". In this state, the liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa determines that the “second error notification sound” has the highest priority among the “second error notification sound” to “fifth error notification sound”. Only “sound” is reproduced, and “third error notification sound” to “fifth error notification sound” are stored in a “stop” state.

  As described above, when a plurality of types of errors larger than the number of channels dedicated to errors occur, in the sound reproduction area, the error notification sound with higher priority is stored from the monaural data, and the stored error notification sound is stored. The priority is judged and only the error notification sound with the highest priority is reproduced.

  Alternatively, the present invention is not limited to this example. In the sound reproduction area, the channel dedicated to the error notification sound is only “ch0”, and only the error notification sound having the highest priority error among the generated errors is “ch0”. You may make it memorize | store and reproduce | regenerate.

  Alternatively, of the error notification sound that is occurring, the monaural data of the error notification sound that is not stored in the sound reproduction area is stored in the channel from which the monaural data of the error notification sound is erased when the error notification cancellation condition is satisfied. Instead, it may be stored in the channel in which the monaural data of the error notification sound having the lowest priority is stored. Also in this case, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa reproduces only the error notification sound having the highest priority.

In the above-described embodiment, when the reproduction of the sound data of the effect sound is completed, the sound data is erased from the sound reproduction area. However, the present invention is not limited to this example.
For example, even when the reproduction of the sound data of the effect sound is finished, it may be stored in a “stop” state without being erased from the sound reproduction area. In such an example, when new sound data is to be reproduced in a channel in which sound data is stored in the “stop” state after that, the sound data stored in the “stop” state is used. Erase and store new sound data in the channel for playback.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect input control process (step S2200) is performed in the V blank interrupt process of FIG. 49 of the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa. Instead, this effect input control process is performed as described above. 30 may be performed after step S1300 of the timer interruption process of the effect control board 102 of FIG. 30 and before step S1400.

  In this case, the sub CPU 102a inputs the operation detection signal based on the player's selection operation of the production mode, thereby setting the selected production mode and generating the production mode designation command for designating the production mode. The image is transmitted to the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa of the image control board 105. The liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa performs control to output a dedicated effect sound in the effect mode indicated by the effect mode designation command received from the effect control board 102.

  Further, in this case, the sub CPU 102 a generates an effect control command indicating the content of effect control executed based on the effect input control process, and transmits the effect control command to the liquid crystal control CPU 105 Aa of the image control board 105. The liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa performs image control processing and sound output control processing based on the control content of the effect control command received from the effect control board 102.

  Further, in this case, the sub CPU 102a inputs an operation detection signal based on an operation for increasing or decreasing the player's volume, thereby specifying a volume level and providing a notification effect for notifying the volume. A control command is generated and transmitted to the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa of the image control board 105. Based on the control content of the notification control command received from the effect control board 102, the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa displays a notification image for notifying the volume level on the image display device 14 and also issues a notification sound reproduction command for notifying the volume level. It is generated and transmitted to the VDP 105Ba, and the VDP 105Ba performs control to output a notification sound from the sound output device 15 based on this reproduction command.

  Further, in this case, by inputting an operation detection signal based on an operation for increasing or decreasing the player's light amount, a notification control command for specifying a light amount and performing a notification effect for notifying the light amount is generated. To the liquid crystal control CPU 105Aa of the image control board 105. The liquid crystal control CPU 105 </ b> Aa displays a notification image for notifying the amount of light on the image display device 14 based on the control content of the notification control command received from the effect control board 102.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a gaming machine that performs the processing of the main control board 101, the effect control board 102, the image control board 105, and the lamp control board 104 with one control board may be applied. .

  In the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, the specific game advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time-short game state). A state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) is set, and in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of jackpot determinations (the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed) reaches 84 times. It was described as “ST machine”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the “ST machine”, and the high probability state continues until the next jackpot is won (or the high probability gaming state continues, for example, 10,000 times). It may be a gaming machine having a “big hit” and a “normal jackpot” in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a low probability gaming state.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a jigball game machine and an arrangement ball gaming machine.

Y gaming machine 6 first start opening 6a first start opening detection sensor 7 second start opening 7a second start opening detection sensor 8 large winning opening 9 first winning gate 10 second winning gate 14 image display device 15 sound output device 17A 1st decoration member 17B 2nd decoration member 17C 3rd decoration member 18A 1st effect button 19A 2nd effect button 70 2nd starting port control device 80 Big winning opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c Sub RAM

In order to achieve the above-described object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application provides storage means for storing sound data, a plurality of sound output channels, and sound data for each of the plurality of sound output channels. Channel setting means for setting, sound output means for outputting sound based on sound data set in the sound output channel, effect control means for controlling effects related to the game, and operation means operable by the player In the gaming machine, the effect control means can execute a specific effect that allows the operation means to be operated a plurality of times in a predetermined operation effective period, and the specific effect is executed each time an operation is performed. When the predetermined effect is executed when the specific effect is being executed in the first effect mode that outputs the first operation sound, the second effect mode is output that outputs a second operation sound different from the first operation sound. Aspect Are changeable, the channel setting means, when said specific effect takes place in the first representation embodiment, the operation is Ru made to the operating means, the plurality of sound output based on the first operation selects the sound output channels among sound data channel has not been set, set the sound data of the first operation sound to the sound output channel that the selected, when the predetermined condition is met, the second operation sound and setting the sound data to the sound output channel and same sound output channel sound data is set in the first operation sound.

Claims (1)

Storage means for storing sound data;
Multiple sound output channels,
Channel setting means for setting sound data for each sound output channel;
Sound output means for outputting sound based on sound data set in the sound output channel;
Production control means for controlling the production of the game;
A gaming machine comprising operating means operable by a player,
The production control means can execute a specific production that prompts the operation means to perform a plurality of operations,
The channel setting means includes
When the specific effect is performed in the first effect mode, the sound data of the first operation sound is set to the same sound output channel based on the operation performed on the operation means,
Based on an operation performed on the operation means when the specific effect is performed in a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, the first operation sound and A game machine, wherein sound data of a different second operation sound is set to the same sound output channel.